mt15032 S NX PDF

SIEMENS
Advanced
yS
Simulation Processes
and Solutions
Student Guide
March 2015
MT15032-s-NX 10
mt15032-s-nx10
N
Proprietary and restricted rights notice
yS
This software and related documentation are proprietary to Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software Inc.
© 2015 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. All Rights Reserved.
All trademarks belong to their respective holders.
N
2 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10
Contents
yS
Proprietary and restricted rights notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Course overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Primary topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Who should attend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Provided course materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Lesson format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Classroom system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Student responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Part I: Analyzing a model
Introduction to Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Advanced Simulation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
What Advanced Simulation can do for you . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
The finite element analysis process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Review questions — Introduction to Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Working with Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Using assemblies to manage CAE data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Working with CAE model files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Working with your model in the Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Creating new entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Controlling visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Editing and managing entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Moving entities in the Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Filtering entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
N
Physical, material, and mesh views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Simulation File View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Review questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Selecting entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Filtering entity selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filtering entity selection by method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Smart Selector Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 3

Contents
Contents
Review questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Basic meshing techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
yS
Creating a 3D tetrahedral mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Understanding 3D tetrahedral mesh quality evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Creating a 2D free mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Defining the 2D meshing method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Seed meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Assigning shell element thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Viewing shell element thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Creating a 2D mapped mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Geometry-based and FE-based boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Structural loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Load distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Structural constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Predefined constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Review questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Solving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
The solution process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Supported FE solvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Solver language in NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Solution options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Output requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Solver parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
NX Nastran structural analysis and solution types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
N
NX Nastran structural analysis and solution types, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
NX Nastran structural analysis and solution types, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
NX Nastran solution files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
NX Nastran solution files, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Defining multiple solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Associating boundary conditions with solution steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Contents
Post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Loading analysis results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Importing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Results types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Post views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
yS
Contour plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Marker plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Cutting plane displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Deformed model displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Overlaying post views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Saving display settings as templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Annotating post-processing displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Animating results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Part II: Preparing the geometry
Geometry idealization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Geometry idealization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Preparing to modify the idealized part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Promoting solid or sheet bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Linking geometry in the idealized and master parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Creating midsurfaces before meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Selecting appropriate parts for midsurfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Creating a midsurface by pairing faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Split Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Idealize Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Defeature Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Sew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Divide Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
N
Synchronous modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Modifying parts with Synchronous Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Preparing to modify the idealized part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Synchronous Modeling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Deleting faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Moving faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Adding a volume to a model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Workflow for creating and updating a mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Contents
Contents
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Geometry repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Using NX Modeling commands to repair geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Understanding CAD issues reported during FEM creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
yS
Repairing a model with the FEM is created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Repairing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Viewing features in the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Creating surfaces using 3D curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Surface creation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Surface addition and removal commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Review questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Geometry abstraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Polygon geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Comparing geometry idealization and geometry abstraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
The geometry abstraction process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Automatically abstracting geometry during meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Splitting an edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Splitting a face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Merging edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Merging faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Stitching edges of midsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Collapsing an edge to a point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Suppressing holes in sheet bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Identifying and repairing polygon body problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Part III: Meshing techniques
Mesh collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

N
Mesh collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Mesh collector uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Creating a mesh collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Managing mesh properties with mesh collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Overriding physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Materials and physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Material types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Contents
Using custom materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Material orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Physical property tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Creating a physical property table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Mesh colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
yS
Defining solver-specific element attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Element size and mesh density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Setting element size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Transitioning element size from local to global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Controlling local mesh density (Mesh Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Mapped Hole mesh controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Fillet mesh controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Cylinder mesh controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Additional mesh control types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Beam modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Preparing geometry for beam modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Creating a 1D mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Ensuring consistent 1D element orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Creating beam cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Workflow for defining beam cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Defining cross section orientation and offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Displaying beam cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Setting up persistent solid cross section display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Setting up persistent wireframe cross section display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Requesting force output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Beam post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Calculating beam stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Stress calculation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Displaying results on cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
N
Adding fillets to cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Connecting meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Mesh mating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Setting mesh mating condition types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Geometry-based 1D connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
FE-based 1D connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Contents
Contents
Connecting edges and faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

Connecting points and nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Defining spider element connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Working with RBE2 and RBE3 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
yS
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Bolt modeling and pre-loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Modeling bolted connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Bolt pre-load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Bolt pre-loads with NX Nastran and NX Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Pre-loaded bolts modeled with beam elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Pre-loaded bolts modeled with solid elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
3D swept meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Creating a 3D swept mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Generating a mesh with an inferred target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Sweeping a mesh to a target face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Sweeping a mesh between two solid meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Sweeping a mesh through a volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Using Split Body to subdivide a body prior to swept meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Manual meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Manual meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

Node creation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Node copy commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Creating an element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Element copy commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
N
Element extrude and revolve commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
2D element modify commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Node and element management commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
More node and element management commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Morphing a mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Displaying nodes independently of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Mesh quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

Contents
Checking your finite element model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

Model check commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Evaluating element quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Checking for free and non-manifold element edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Checking and orienting the normals of 2D elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
yS
Checking for duplicate elements and nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Displaying an element’s material orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Part IV: Boundary condition techniques
Boundary condition techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Organizing boundary conditions in folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

Displaying boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Creating displays to validate temperature or pressure loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
XY plots of boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Simulation coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
Absolute coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Work coordinate system (WCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Local coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Nodal coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
Excluding objects from boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Resolving boundary condition conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15
Fields and expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Fields in Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

Using fields in Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Types of fields in Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Spatial maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Using fields to specify boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Expressions in Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
N
Inputs to expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
Example of an expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Using expressions to specify boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Part V: Post processing techniques
Post processing techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

Contents
Contents
Graphing a single result across nodes or elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

Graphing results across multiple iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Graph templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Editing a graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
Scatter plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
yS
Two function plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8
Combining and manipulating results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Result probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11
Applications of result probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Result variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-16
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Exporting a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Adding images to the report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
Part VI: Advanced Simulation solutions
Modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2

How stiffness and mass affect natural frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
Supported modal analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Using elements for a modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
Using materials for a modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
Defining boundary conditions for a modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
Modal pre-stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
Setting modal solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
Rigid body modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Reviewing modal analysis results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
Animating mode shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
N
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
Thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2

Supported thermal analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
Using elements for a thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Using materials for a thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
Defining thermal material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
Defining constraints and loads for a thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

Contents
Additional boundary conditions for thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8

Setting thermal solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
Thermal analysis results types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
Reviewing thermal results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-11
Thermal stresses and strains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-12
yS
Thermal stress analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
Buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2

Linear buckling assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
Supported buckling analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4
Using elements for a buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
Using materials for a buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
Defining boundary conditions for a buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7
Setting buckling solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8
Reviewing buckling analysis results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
Contact and gluing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
Contact and glue conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2

Finding face pairs for contact and gluing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
Defining surface-to-surface contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
Defining parameters for contact conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
Understanding the contact solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6
Contact solve monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
Defining edge-to-surface gluing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8
Defining surface-to-surface gluing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
Defining parameters for glue conditions (NX Nastran) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-10
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-12
N
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-14
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Symmetry types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
Symmetric constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
Modeling symmetry using coupled DOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
Defining coupled degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
Axisymmetric analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Axisymmetric modeling in the structural environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-8

Contents
Contents
Aligning the axisymmetric model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-10

Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-11
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-14
yS
Assembly FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
Assembly FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2

Assembly FEM vs. multi-body FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
Assembly FEM workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
Creating assembly FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
Associative assembly FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Non-associative assembly FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Subassembly FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
Connecting component FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
Resolving label conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1
Nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2

Supported nonlinear solution types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
Considering material plasticity conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
Comparing linear and nonlinear static solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-5
Geometric nonlinear problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
Using elements for solution type SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Using materials for SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-8
Entering stress/strain data for SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-9
Defining boundary conditions for SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-10
Setting solution attributes for solution type SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11
Nonlinear static analysis is an iterative solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-12
Incrementing loads using multiple subcases in SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-13
Example of incrementing loads in SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-14
Viewing plastic strain results for SOL 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15
Nonlinear analysis resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-16
N
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-17
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-18
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-20
Geometry optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1
Geometry optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2

Geometry optimization workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
Creating a geometry optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
Defining the objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
Defining design constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6

Contents
Defining design variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7

Part files modified by Geometry Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-8
Solver iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
Displaying results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
yS
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
Adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1
Refining a mesh with Adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2

Supported solution types for adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
Adaptive refinement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
Excluding regions of the mesh from adaptive refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
Adaptive meshing output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
Adaptive meshing workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
Pre-processing requirements for adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
Viewing adaptive meshing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9
Examples of mesh refinement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-14
Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1
What is an external superelement? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2

External superelement solution types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3
Static reduction overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-4
Static reduction — understanding boundary DOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
Dynamic reduction overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6
Dynamic reduction — dynamic and static behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7
Dynamic reduction — understanding boundary DOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-8
Defining boundary DOFs for a static or dynamic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-9
Defining DOF sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-10
Setting external superelement solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
System modeling workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-12
Generating external superelements for Advanced Simulation system models . . . . . . . . . . . 34-13
Replacing a component FEM with a superelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14
Superelement mapping considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
N
Connecting superelement boundary nodes to the residual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-16
Superelement displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-18
Controlling the display of base FEM approximations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-19
Supported system model solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-20
Solving the system model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-21
Example: Assigning external superelements in the bulk data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-22
Example: Defining superelement connections and orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-23
Post-processing system models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-24
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-25
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-27

Contents
Contents
Part VII: Optional topics
Managing CAE analysis data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
Introduction to Teamcenter Integration for NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2

Starting Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
yS
Locating parts in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
Activity: Log on to Teamcenter and find the parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-5
Working with the Teamcenter Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
Search for items in the Teamcenter Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-10
Simulation Process Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11
Creating and saving CAE data in Teamcenter Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
Simulation Process Management data model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
Using Simulation File View in Teamcenter Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
Finding related CAE items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
Cloning CAE models in Teamcenter Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18
Importing and exporting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-21
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
Response Simulation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-2

Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-3
Special boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4
Solution attributes for Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-5
Response Simulation solve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-6
Defining damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-7
FRF and Transmissibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8
Analysis events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9
Excitation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-10
Function tools for Response Simulation utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-11
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-13
Strain gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-14
Response evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-15
Response functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-16
Contour results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-17
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-18
N
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-20
Flexible body analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-2
Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-3
About the flexible body modal solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-4
Assigning a material to the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-5
Connecting the flexible body FEM to the mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-6
Defining connection and load degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-8
Solving the NX Nastran modal solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-9
Defining the flexible link in the mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-11

Contents
Choosing modes to include in the analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-12

Solving the model and animating the mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-13
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-14
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-16
yS
NX Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1
NX Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
Analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3
Elements for structural solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
Supported material types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5
Workflow for one-way coupling of temperature loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-6
Workflow for two-way coupled thermal-structural solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
Controlling time steps in a coupled solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8
Specifying coupling times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-9
Using sequential or iterative coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-11
Specifying the types of data to exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-12
Mapping results data to another model in NX Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-13
Workflow for mapping temperatures onto a structural model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-14
Controlling plasticity and creep effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-15
Analyzing multiphysics results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-16
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-17
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-19
Acoustic and vibro-acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Acoustic and Vibro-Acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-2

Supported solutions and analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-3
Defining surface impedance or admittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-4
Defining structural panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-5
Coupling acoustic and structural elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-6
Defing fluid-structure interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-7
Defining modal damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-8
Defining modal contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-9
Defining panel contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-10
Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-11
Analyzing vibro-acoustic contribution data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-12
N
Using a load recipe to map external load data to the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-13
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-14
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-16
NX Nastran SOL 200 Design Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
SOL 200 Design Optimization overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2

Solution types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-3
Optimization design cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-4
Design responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-5
Design objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6

Contents
Contents
Design variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7

Design constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-9
SOL 200 Parameters – Bulk Data tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10
SOL 200 Parameters – Parameters tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11
Post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12
yS
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-15
Import and export of model data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-1

Importing model data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-2
Exporting model data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-3
Solver version support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-4
I-deas Universal files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-5
Import and export I-deas Universal files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-6
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-7
Review question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-8
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-9
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-1
New file templates overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-2
File New tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-3
Standard templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-4
User-defined templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-5
Create a new file using a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-6
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-7
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-9
The finite element analysis method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-1

The finite element method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-2
Finite element mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-3
Assumed displacement field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4
Element stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-5
Equilibrium equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-6
Global stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-7
Solving and results recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-8
N
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Course overview
yS
Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions introduces the NX Advanced Simulation finite element
modeling and results visualization product.
It is intended for design engineers and analysts who want to learn the details of how to perform
finite element analysis using NX. Students will learn how to generate meshes, define materials,
apply boundary conditions, solve, and review analysis results. Students will also learn techniques
for setting up and generating structural, dynamic, and thermal analyses, using optimization, and
working with large models.
Primary topics
After successfully completing this course, you should be able to perform the following tasks in NX.
• Introduction to Advanced Simulation
• Managing CAE analysis data
• Selecting entities
• Preparing a model for analysis
• Meshing and mesh quality
• Boundary conditions
• Post-processing and reports
• Materials and physical properties
• Linear and nonlinear static analysis
• Modal, thermal, and buckling analysis

N
• Response simulation
• Contact and gluing
• Symmetry
• Finite element modeling with assemblies
• Optimization
• Adaptive meshing

Course
Course overview
overview
• Superelements
• Flexible body analysis
• Acoustic analysis
yS
• Multiphysics
• Import and export of model data
• Templates
Who should attend

This course is intended for intended for analysts, engineers who want to perform finite element
analysis.
Prerequisites
• The Essentials for NX Designers class, or in self-paced training: Essentials – NX Basics and the
CAD Foundation courses.
• Working knowledge of NX Modeling.
• Basic understanding of finite element analysis principles.
Provided course materials

• Student Guide
• Activity Material
Lesson format
The general format for lesson content is:
N
• presentation
• online activity
• project (additional optional activity, for some lessons)
• summary and review questions
It is important that you work through the lessons in the sequence presented. Later lessons assume
you have learned concepts and techniques taught in earlier lessons. If necessary, you can always
refer to any previous activity where a method or technique was originally taught.

Course overview
Classroom system information

Note
Your instructor will provide the following items for working in the classroom:
yS
Student login:
User name:
Password:
Instructor:
Roles
Roles tailor your interface by hiding tools you are unlikely to use in a given role.
The role you choose affects the number of buttons that appear on toolbars, and the number of
shortcut menu items you will see.
This course was designed to use the Advanced role.

To activate a role:
1. On the Resource bar, click the Roles tab to open the palette.
2. Open the Content folder.
3. Click the role you want or drag it to the graphics window.

N
4. Click OK to accept the new role or click Cancel to cancel your selection.

Course
Course overview
overview
Student responsibilities
• Be on time.
• Be considerate of the needs of other students.
yS
• Listen attentively and take notes.
• Ask questions.
• Practice what you learn.
• Have fun!
N
Part I: Analyzing a model
yS
N
mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions
N
yS
Lesson 1: Introduction to Advanced Simulation
yS
Objectives
After you complete this lesson, you will be able to:

• Understand what NX Advanced Simulation can do for you.
N
mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 1-1
Lesson
Lesson 1: 1: Introduction
Introduction to Advanced
to Advanced Simulation
Simulation
Advanced Simulation overview

Advanced Simulation:
• Is a comprehensive finite element modeling and results visualization product.
yS
• Includes a full suite of pre-processing and post-processing commands.
• Supports industry-standard solvers, including NX Nastran, NX Thermal and Flow, NX Electronic

Systems Cooling, NX Space Systems Thermal, Abaqus, ANSYS, and LS Dyna.
N
1-2 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10
Introduction to Advanced Simulation
What Advanced Simulation can do for you

The traditional approach for validating a design is to build a prototype and test it. If the test reveals
problems with the design, the design is changed and a new prototype is built and tested. This
time-consuming and expensive iterative process continues until the prototype performs satisfactorily.
yS
A complementary approach is to use Advanced Simulation to perform a finite element analysis (FEA)
of the design. With FEA, you can:
• Simulate your product’s performance in a virtual environment.
• Identify and remedy potential problem areas before you construct a prototype.
• Reduce product development cost and time by building fewer prototypes and running fewer tests.
N
Lesson
Simulation
The finite element analysis process

1. Obtain a part or an assembly.
2. Select the solver and specify the analysis type, for example, NX Nastran and SOL 101.
yS
3. Idealize the part.
4. Create a mesh on the part. Define the material and physical property data.
5. Apply the boundary conditions. Boundary conditions include loads and constraints.
6. Solve the model using an industry-standard FE solver.
7. Review the results and prepare a report.

N
Introduction to Advanced Simulation
Review questions — Introduction to Advanced Simulation

1. What are the solvers that you can use with Advanced Simulation?
2. List the steps of the finite element analysis process.
yS
N
Lesson
Simulation
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Learned about what NX Advanced Simulation can do for you.
yS
N
Lesson 2: Working with Advanced Simulation
yS
Objectives

• Work with the various types of Advanced Simulation files.
• Manage entities in your CAE model using the Simulation Navigator.
• Navigate the files loaded in your current session using the Simulation File View.
• Perform a finite element analysis using Advanced Simulation.

N
Lesson
Lesson 2: 2: Working
Working with Advanced
with Advanced Simulation
Simulation
Using assemblies to manage CAE data

Unlike other pre-processors, Advanced Simulation stores and manages your CAE model as an
assembly.
Your solid model, FE model, and analysis data are distributed among separate physical files, which
yS
are assembled into a full CAE model for solving.
A simple CAE model (1) in the Simulation Navigator and (2) in the Assembly Navigator.
Because your CAE model is assembled from multiple files, you can:
• Easily reuse geometry and meshes in multiple analyses.
• Manage file loading for improved performance.
• Assemble multiple FE models into an assembly FEM.
• Distribute analysis and modeling tasks among members of a team.
• Update CAE models automatically when the CAD geometry changes.

N
Working with Advanced Simulation
Working with CAE model files

A CAE model is an assembly that contains all the data required to perform an analysis. The simplest
CAE model consists of two files:
• The Simulation file is an assembly that contains boundary conditions and solution-specific data.
yS
• The FEM file contains mesh data and physical and material properties. Consistent with the NX
master model approach, the FEM file is a component of the Simulation file.
A CAE model is associated to the model geometry contained in the CAD part (.prt) file. You can:
• Create an idealized part to manage analysis-specific geometry modifications. The master part is
a component of the idealized part. All modifications are stored with the idealized part file, and the
original master model geometry is unaltered.
• Associate your model directly to an NX master part.
Assembly FEM files
An assembly FEM file is an optional file type you can use to create CAE models that consist of
multiple FEM files. An assembly FEM file serves as the master model for a Simulation file. It contains
occurrence and position data for component FEM files, as well as connection elements and property
overrides.
N
Lesson
Simulation
Working with your model in the Simulation Navigator

The Simulation Navigator presents the file relationships and analysis data in your CAE model as a
graphical, interactive, hierarchical tree.
From the Simulation Navigator, you can:
yS
• Review the structure, content, and status of your analysis.
• Navigate among related files that contain analysis data.
• Create analysis files, meshes, boundary conditions, and so on.
• Show and hide geometry, meshes, boundary conditions, and so on.
• Edit, rename, delete, and interrogate most defined analysis entities.
You can complete almost any task in an analysis workflow without leaving the navigator.
A component FEM file
Mesh collectors
Loads and constraints
A solution and results

N
The commands available for nodes in the Simulation Navigator are context-sensitive, and may
vary depending on your selected solver and analysis type. Right-click any node in the tree to see
the commands for that node.
yS
N
Lesson
Simulation
Creating new entities

You can create new entities from the Simulation Navigator. Entities that you can create include
meshes, loads, and constraints. You can right-click any container node in the tree to create a new
instance of the corresponding entity. For example:
yS
• When the FEM file is displayed, you can create a new mesh collector or a new 3D mesh when
you right-click the 3D Collectors node.
• When the Simulation file is displayed, you can create a new load when you right-click the Load
Container node, or you can create a new subcase when you right-click a solution.
N
Controlling visibility
You control the visibility of entities in the graphics window from the Simulation Navigator. A visibility
check box appears next to each entity’s node.
• A red check indicates that the object is visible.
yS
• A grey check indicates that the object is hidden.
N
Lesson
Simulation
Editing and managing entities

You can edit, rename, or delete an entity, or view information about the entity using the shortcut
menus in the Simulation Navigator.
yS
N
Moving entities in the Simulation Navigator

The Simulation Navigator supports limited drag-and-drop capability, which lets you organize your
model. For example:
• You can move the elements in one collector to another collector.
yS
• You can copy boundary conditions from one solution into another solution.
N
Lesson
Simulation
Filtering entities
You can apply a filter to remove any entity from the navigator tree in the Simulation Navigator. By
default, the Simulation Navigator displays nodes for:
• CSYS
yS
• Groups
• DOF sets
• Regions
• Fields
• Polygon geometry
• Mesh collectors
• Simulation Object, Load, and Constraint Containers
Filtering entities helps you to reduce clutter and remove rarely used entities from the navigator tree.
Mesh collectors, Filter and Mesh collectors sorted Mesh collectors, wildcard filter
Sort turned off by name = B*, sorted by name
3D Collectors 3D Collectors 3D Collectors
Solid(1) Solid(1) Solid(1) (Filtered)
PPT ALT BOL
BTZ BOL BOT
ALT BOT BTM
NAN BTM BTZ
BTM BTZ
LER LER
BOL NAN
BOT PPT
N
Physical, material, and mesh views

In the Simulation Navigator, data is organized by element order in the standard view. The 3D mesh
collectors are grouped together, as are the 2D, 1D and 0D mesh collectors.
For large models that contain multiple mesh collectors, it can be useful to determine how physical and
yS
material properties are distributed among meshes.
When you interrogate large finite element models that contain multiple meshes, materials, and
physical property tables, you can use the Physical Properties View to determine which meshes
share the same physical properties, and the Material View to determine which meshes and polygon
bodies share the same materials.
To hide the mesh collectors and view only the meshes, you can use the Mesh View.
To select one of these views, make the FEM the work part. Then, right-click the column heading in
the Simulation Navigator and choose the appropriate view.
The following graphic shows an example of the (1) Standard View and (2) Physical Properties View.
N
The following graphic shows an example of the (3) Materials View and (4) Mesh View.

Lesson
Simulation
yS
N
Simulation File View

The Simulation File View is a special browser window within the Simulation Navigator. You can
use this browser to:
• View all loaded parts as well as all FEM and Simulation files within their hierarchical relationship
yS
to the master part.
• Change the part being displayed. The icon and name of the currently displayed part are shown in
color.
• Create new FEM and Simulation files for any design or idealized part without having to first
display the part.
N
Lesson
Simulation
Activity
Perform a finite element analysis — This activity introduces you to Advanced Simulation by walking
through a simple linear statics analysis.
yS
N
Review questions
1. True/False. The FEM file includes elements, physical and material properties, and boundary
conditions.
yS
2. True/False. You cannot move a mesh to a different mesh collector.
3. How can you see a listing of all physical properties defined in your model?
4. True/False. To work on a particular file, double-click it in the Simulation File View.

N
Lesson
Simulation
Summary
In this lesson, you learned about how to work with Advanced Simulation, including:
• The types of Advanced Simulation files.
yS
• How to create, edit, and manage modeling entities using the Simulation Navigator.
• How to modify data shown in the Simulation Navigator.
• How to navigate the files in your session using the Simulation File View.
• How to analyze a linear statics model using Advanced Simulation.

N
Lesson 3: Selecting entities
yS
Objectives

• Select entities using selection methods.
• Use groups to organize the entities in your model.

N
Lesson
Lesson 3: 3: Selecting
Selecting entities
entities
Filtering entity selection

When you need to select entities in the graphics window, you can filter the entities that you can select
using the Type Filter and Selection Scope options in the Top Border bar. As you move your cursor
over the model, only the entities that are available for selection are highlighted.
yS
In Advanced Simulation, you can use the Method options on the Top Border bar to select related
entities easily and more efficiently. To further refine your method filter, use the Smart Selector
Options button.
For example, suppose you want to select all cylindrical faces in a body to apply bearing loads. If
you set the Method list to Cylinder Faces, and select the polygon body, the software selects all
the cylindrical faces in the solid body.
N
Selecting entities
Filtering entity selection by method

The Method list is available on the Top Border bar when you do the following:
• Use the Show Only or Show Adjacent options to control the display of entities.
yS
• Create meshes.
• Create and edit nodes and elements manually.
• Create FE groups.
• Create node and element sets.
• Create loads and constraints.
The methods and types available at any time vary depending on the operation you are performing
and the specific context.
N
Lesson
Selecting entities
entities
Smart Selector Options

You can use various criteria to determine how and whether different polygonal geometry is related.
For example, these criteria determine the maximum angle between two faces that are considered
tangent, or the minimum and maximum radii that determine what is considered a fillet face. You can
yS
adjust these criteria depending on your model, or to filter selections when working with complex parts.
Click Smart Selector Options on the Top Border bar to control these criteria.
For example, suppose you want to select from a number of cylindrical faces in a part. By specifying
the minimum and maximum angle for cylinder and fillet faces, you can more effectively filter the
selection to select only the faces you want.
N
Selecting entities
Groups
Groups are user or system-defined collections of FE and/or geometric entities. A group can contain
multiple types of entities, which can include:
• Nodes, elements, meshes
yS
• Mesh points, points
• Polygon faces, polygon bodies
• Curves
• Coordinate systems
N
Lesson
Selecting entities
entities
Review questions
1. Are selection methods always available?
2. True/False. The Type Filter list contains the same options regardless of the command selected.
yS
3. What feature allows you to create subsets of entities like nodes, elements, and meshes, among
others?
N
Selecting entities
Summary
In this lesson you learned:
• How to select entities.
yS
• How to use groups to organize your model.
N
N
yS
Lesson 4: Basic meshing techniques
yS
Objectives

• Generate a 3D tetrahedral mesh.
• Generate 2D free and mapped meshes.
• Generate a 2D seed mesh, then use it to generate a 3D mesh.

N
Lesson
Lesson 4: 4: BasicBasic meshing
meshing techniques
techniques
Meshing
The meshing capabilities available in Advanced Simulation let you automatically generate:
• 0D elements on selected points.
yS
• 1D (beam) elements on edges.
• 2D (shell) elements on faces.
• 3D (solid) elements on volumes.

N
Basic meshing techniques
Creating a 3D tetrahedral mesh

To create a mesh of three-dimensional solid elements on a selected body, you can use the 3D
Tetrahedral Mesh command. 3D meshes are useful for modeling parts with thick walls, such as
cast, machined, and molded parts.
yS
You can generate a mesh of linear or parabolic tetrahedral elements.
N
Lesson
meshing techniques
techniques
Understanding 3D tetrahedral mesh quality evaluation

When you use 3D Tetrahedral Mesh to generate a solid mesh on your model, the software
automatically evaluates the quality of the resulting elements.
These quality checks measure, for example:
yS
• Different aspects of an element's deviation from an ideal size and shape, such as aspect ratio.
• The determinant of the Jacobian.
• Whether any tetrahedral elements have collapsed.
If you evaluate mesh quality at the time the mesh is generated, you can either automatically or
manually correct quality issues before you try to solve the model.
N
Creating a 2D free mesh
You can use 2D Mesh to generate a mesh of linear or parabolic triangular or quadrilateral
elements on selected surfaces. 2D elements are also commonly known as shell or plate elements.
yS
You can use 2D Mesh to create a mesh of elements on selected surfaces. For example, you can
use 2D Mesh to generate a mesh on a midsurface model, such as the midsurface of a bracket
shown below.
N
Lesson
meshing techniques
techniques
yS
N
Defining the 2D meshing method

To define how to generate the mesh, use the Meshing Method option on the 2D Mesh dialog box.
• With the Subdivision method, the software uses a recursive subdivision technique to generate
the mesh on the selected faces. With recursive subdivision, the software repeatedly divides and
yS
then subdivides the selected geometry to create the mesh. With this method, once the software
has generated the initial set of elements, it then performs a series of cleaning and smoothing
operations to improve the overall quality of the mesh.
• With the Paver method, the software combines a paving technique with a recursive subdivision
technique to produce more structured, boundary conforming free meshes with good quality. This
hybrid approach allows the software to create a more structured mesh around the surface's
outer boundary as well as around any interior holes (or loops) while still generating a free mesh
on the rest of the surface.
2D mesh with subdivision method

N
2D mesh with paver method

Lesson
meshing techniques
techniques
Seed meshes
A seed mesh is a 2D mesh applied to selected faces on a solid part. When you create a 3D mesh
on the part, the seed mesh drives the size and node locations of 3D elements on those faces. Use
seed meshes to:
yS
• Control element distribution on fillets and cylinder faces.
• Create more regular meshes on mappable faces.
• Control local element lengths in areas of interest.

N
Assigning shell element thickness

You can define the thickness of 2D shell elements as a constant value, an NX expression. You can
define it in several places, depending on your solver and your needs.
Property Where defined
yS
Corner Node Thickness Element Associated Data dialog box
Midsurface thickness Geometry
Default Thickness Physical property table (for example, the PSHELL
dialog box if you are using NX Nastran)
Thickness Physical property table
N
Lesson
meshing techniques
techniques
Viewing shell element thickness

To view and visually validate the distribution of 2D element thickness values in your model, you can
create three different types of displays :
• To create a temporary display of the 2D element thickness values in your model, you can use the
yS
Thickness Information command in the Simulation Navigator.
• To display the elements in the graphics window with their assigned thickness values, use the
Element Thickness and Offset option in the Mesh Display dialog box.
• To generate a contour plot of shell element thicknesses as a standard post view, use the Plot
Thickness Contours in the Simulation Navigator.
N
Creating a 2D mapped mesh

To generate a structured mesh of linear or parabolic triangular or quadrilateral elements on selected
surfaces, use the 2D Mapped Mesh command. This command lets you create mapped meshes on
three and four-sided faces.
yS
Mapped meshes have the following characteristics:
• They allow you to better control the distribution of elements across a surface than free meshes.
• They are useful for meshing certain types of geometry, such as fillets and cylinders, where
regular meshes are desirable.
If you generate a mapped mesh on a three sided face, you can control the vertex at which the
mesh degenerates.
(Top right) Mapped mesh on three sided face; (Bottom right) Mapped mesh on a four sided face
N
Lesson
meshing techniques
techniques
Activities
Basic meshing techniques activities:
• Generate a 3D mesh — This activity explores various techniques for producing a high-quality
tetrahedral mesh.
yS
• Generate a 2D mesh — This activity defines a 2D free mesh on a midsurface.
• Generate a hexahedral (swept) mesh using a 2D seed mesh — This activity defines a 2D mapped
mesh and uses it to create a hexahedral mesh.
See also:
• Define constraints using local coordinate systems (Boundary condition techniques lesson) —
This activity uses seed meshes to provide fine control over the elements and node locations
where two meshes meet.
For more information
See Meshing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Review questions
1. True/False. 3D tetrahedral meshing is well suited for irregular part geometries produced by
manufacturing processes like casting.
yS
2. Name the two meshing methods for 2D free meshes.
3. What is a seed mesh?

N
Lesson
meshing techniques
techniques
Summary
In this lesson you learned how to:
• Generate a 3D tetrahedral mesh.
yS
• Generate a 2D free mesh.
• Generate a 2D mapped mesh.
• Generate a 2D seed mesh, then used it to generate a 3D mesh.

N
Lesson 5: Boundary conditions
yS
Objectives

• Apply loads to a model.
• Apply constraints to a model.

N
Lesson
Lesson 5: 5: Boundary
Boundary conditions
conditions
Boundary conditions
In Advanced Simulation, loads, constraints, and simulation objects are all considered boundary
conditions. Loads include forces and pressures, constraints include fixed constraints and user-defined
constraints, and simulation objects include contact and gluing.
yS
You create boundary conditions using the selected solver language. For example, if you select
the NX Nastran solver, the Force dialog box provides options that are specific to the NX Nastran
FORCE card.
You can apply boundary conditions only when the Simulation file is active.
N
Boundary conditions
Geometry-based and FE-based boundary conditions

Boundary conditions can be applied to:
• Geometry: edges, faces, vertices, and points. Geometry-based boundary conditions update
automatically when you modify the geometry or mesh.
yS
• FE entities: nodes, elements, element faces, and element edges. FE-based boundary conditions
are useful for:
o Imported meshes with no underlying geometry.
o Locations that are not defined by geometry.
o Areas where small faces or edges were removed during abstraction.

N
Lesson
Boundary conditions
conditions
Structural loads
In NX, structural loads include force, moment, torque, pressures, bearing loads, acceleration, gravity,
and centrifugal pressure.
For force loads, you must define the load direction, magnitude, and distribution.
yS
You can define magnitude as a constant value, an NX expression, or a field that defines how a force
load varies with time, frequency, or temperature.
For a complete description of structural loads in Advanced Simulation, see Structural Loads for
Nastran, Abaqus, and ANSYS in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Boundary conditions
Load distribution
Distribution defines how the force load is distributed over the selected object with the following options:
• Total per Object: applies the magnitude specified to each selected item.
yS
• Geometric distribution: distributes the total force load over all the selected items based on area.
• Spatial: uses a unitless field to map the force load to the nodes.
Geometric distribution (left); Total per Object (right); input load = 5

N
Lesson
Boundary conditions
conditions
Structural constraints
A structural constraint defines the available degrees of freedom (DOF) or enforced displacement
acting on nodes. Each translational and rotational degree of freedom may be:
• Free
yS
• Fixed
• Displaced by a specified distance.
You define degrees of freedom and enforced displacements with respect to the global coordinate
system or a local coordinate system.
Use the User Defined Constraint command to constrain individual DOF.

N
Boundary conditions
Predefined constraints
To facilitate modeling common structural boundary conditions, Advanced Simulation provides a
variety of predefined constraint types. Some examples include:
yS
• A Fixed Translation Constraint that fixes all translation degrees of freedom and leaves
rotations free.
• A Pinned Constraint that creates a cylindrical coordinate system at the center of a

cylindrical face. Tangential translation (DOF2) is free; all other DOFs are fixed.
• A Symmetric Constraint that fixes translation normal to the plane of symmetry and fixes
rotation about axes lying in the plane of symmetry.
For a complete description of predefined structural constraints in Advanced Simulation, see Structural
Constraints for Nastran, Abaqus, and ANSYS in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Lesson
Boundary conditions
conditions
Activities
Boundary conditions activities:
• Apply loads and constraints to a bracket
yS
• Apply a bearing load and pinned constraints
• Apply a pressure load and fixed constraint
See Boundary Conditions in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Boundary conditions
Review questions
1. True/False. Boundary conditions cannot be applied to geometry.
2. In what file are boundary conditions located?
yS
3. Give an example of where a bearing load is appropriate.
4. A pinned constraint is based on a cylindrical coordinate system and allows only rotation about
the Z axis. How could you create an equivalent constraint condition using the User Defined
Constraint command? Assume 3D elements.
N
Lesson
Boundary conditions
conditions
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Learned about the structural loads and constraints that you can define in Advanced Simulation.
yS
• Created loads.
• Created constraints.
N
Lesson 6: Solving
yS
Objectives
After you complete the lesson, you will be able to:

• Solve an analysis model.
• Identify some of the solution types available with the NX Nastran solver.
N
Lesson
Lesson 6: 6: Solving
Solving
The solution process

Advanced Simulation uses NX to pre-and post-process the FE model and a FE solver to solve the FE
model. NX interacts with the FE solver as follows:
1. NX writes a solver-specific ASCII input file.
yS
• The input file contains the mesh data, boundary conditions, and solver parameters contained
in the FE model.
• The input file is placed in the same directory as the Simulation file (*.sim).
2. The FE solver runs a batch solution and writes a results file in the same directory as the
Simulation file (*.sim).
3. NX reads the results file and displays the results in Post-processing.

N
Solving
Supported FE solvers
NX Nastran MSC Nastran
NX Thermal/Flow SAMCEF
NX Space Systems Thermal ANSYS
yS
NX Electronics Systems Cooling Abaqus
NX Multiphysics LS-DYNA
This class will teach you how to use Advanced Simulation with the NX Nastran solver.
N
Lesson
Solving
Solver language in NX
To help you prepare your model, the NX user interface uses the language of the specified FE solver.
For example, if you select the NX Nastran solver, you will see element names that correspond to
Nastran element names. You will see solver-specific names for elements, physical properties, loads,
yS
and constraints.
2D Mesh dialog box with NX Nastran selected

as the solver
2D Mesh dialog box with ANSYS selected as

the solver
N
Solving
Solutions
A solution, which is stored in the Simulation file, contains a set of loads, constraints, and simulation
objects. You can solve using these conditions, or create new solutions defined by different conditions.
You can use an unlimited number of solutions per Simulation.
yS
Subcases
Each solution contains additional storage elements called steps or subcases, depending on the solver.
Each step or subcase holds solution entities such as loads, constraints, and simulation objects.
For structural solves in NX Nastran, constraints can be stored in the main solution or in the subcases;
loads are stored in subcases. For thermal solves, loads and constraints are both stored in subcases.
You can create an unlimited number of subcases per solution.
N
Lesson
Solving
Solution options
The solution options available depend on the solver type (such as NX Nastran), the analysis type
(for example, Structural), and the solution type (for example, SOL 101 Linear Statics — Global
Constraints).
yS
N
Solving
Output requests
Output requests identify the type of data output from the solver.
Some output types are selected by default; you must select others explicitly. To modify the default
output requests, use the Customer Defaults dialog box.
yS
You can save a named group of output requests and reuse it in other solutions.
N
Lesson
Solving
Solver parameters
Solver parameters include settings for the selected solver.
yS
N
Solving
NX Nastran structural analysis and solution types

The following tables include a partial list of the solution types available in the NX Nastran structural
analysis type. For a complete list of solution types supported by Advanced Simulation, see the
Advanced Simulation online Help.
yS
Analysis Solution type Description
Linear Static SOL 101 Linear Statics – Structural solve used to solve linear and some
Global Constraints nonlinear problems, such as gaps and contact
elements.
SOL 101 Linear Statics –
Subcase Constraints
SOL101 Superelement
N
Lesson
Solving
NX Nastran structural analysis and solution types, 2

Modal Analysis SOL 103 Real Evaluates normal modes and natural frequencies.
Eigenvalues
yS
SOL 103 Response
Simulation
SOL103 Superelement
SOL103 Flexible Body
Linear Buckling SOL 105 Linear Buckling Determines buckling loads and buckled mode
shapes.
Nonlinear Statics SOL 106 Global Considers geometric and material nonlinear
Constraints behavior.
SOL 106 Subcase
Constraints
N
Solving
NX Nastran structural analysis and solution types, 3

Advanced Nonlinear SOL 601,106 Advanced Considers geometric and material nonlinear
Statics (implicit) Nonlinear Statics behavior.
yS
Design Optimization SOL 200 Design Adjusts the defined design variables within
Optimization the limits you specify as it searches for the
optimum conditions, while working in the scope
SOL 200 Model Update of your overall optimization objective and output
constraints.
Axisymmetric SOL 101 Linear Statics – Solves an FE model that is defined for only
Structural Global Constraints a section cut on one side of the axis of an
axisymmetric part. This greatly reduces the
SOL 101 Linear Statics – degrees of freedom (DOF) and hence also
Subcase Constraints significantly reduces solution time.
N
Lesson
Solving
NX Nastran solution files

For NX Nastran, the following files are generated when you solve the model.
File type Description

*.dat NX Nastran ascii input file
yS
Contains the model data, solution options, and output requests.
You can edit this file at the beginning of the solve process within NX or in a text
editor.
This file is also referred to as an input “deck.”
*.f06 Contains results such as displacements and stresses. Diagnostic information,
warnings, and errors are also written to this file.
The information in the .f06 file is important for debugging solution problems.
*.f04 Contains information that helps you monitor and tune the performance of your
analysis job.
N
Solving
NX Nastran solution files, 2

For NX Nastran, the following files are generated when you solve the model.
File type Description

*.log Contains system information such as the name of the computer on which the
yS
analysis was run. It also contains any system errors encountered during the
analysis.
*.op2 Results output from the solve.
NX reads this binary file during post-processing.
These are the most common NX Nastran file types. For more information on all file types, see the
NX Nastran User's Guide.
N
Lesson
Solving
Defining multiple solutions

You can define multiple solutions in a single Simulation file. With multiple solutions, you can:
• Explore how variations on boundary conditions or solution options affect the analysis results.
yS
• Reuse defined boundary conditions by dragging and dropping them among the defined solutions
and steps or subcases.
• Use the same material and physical properties in all solutions.

N
Solving
Associating boundary conditions with solution steps

Before you can solve your model, the appropriate boundary conditions (loads, constraints, and
simulation objects) must be associated with the appropriate container in each solution step (called a
subcase in Nastran models).
yS
For models with a small number of boundary conditions and few solutions, boundary condition
associations are largely automatic, although you may need to explicitly add or remove boundary
conditions to fully define a solution. With models of larger size and complexity, however, it becomes
increasingly important to track, manage, and document how boundary condition associations are
made.
Automatically adding boundary conditions to the active solution or step
Once you have at least one solution with one or more steps, any boundary conditions you create are
automatically added to the appropriate container in the active solution or solution step. The active
solution and solution step are indicated in the Status column in the Simulation Navigator.
Explicitly adding and removing boundary conditions to the active solution or solution step
If you add a new solution, or add a new step to an existing solution, then any existing boundary
conditions are not automatically added to the new solution or step. You can easily add an existing
boundary condition or boundary condition folder to the active solution by dragging and dropping, or by
using the shortcut menu in the Simulation Navigator.
N
Lesson
Solving
Project
Solving — This optional project uses the SOL 101 Linear Statics – Global Constraints solution
sequence to perform a structural analysis on a tire iron.
yS
N
Solving
Review questions
1. True/False. In a solution, loads are always stored in subcases.
2. In NX Nastran, which output file is important for debugging solution problems?
yS
N
Lesson
Solving
Summary
• How to solve a finite element model.
yS
• About various solution types available for NX Nastran.
N
Lesson 7: Post-processing
yS
Objectives

• Display analysis results using the Post Processing Navigator.
• Create and alter post views.
• Identify numerical results.

N
Lesson
Lesson 7: 7: Post-processing
Post-processing
Post-processing
Using the Post Processing Navigator and post —processing tools, you can:
• Create contour plots.
yS
• Create marker plots.
• Create cutting-plane views.
• View and animate deformations.

N
Clockwise from the top left: The pre-processed model; results from a linear statics analysis;
results from modal analysis; a graph of modal displacements along an edge.

Post-processing
Loading analysis results

To load results from the current simulation, you can either:
• Double-click the results node in the Simulation Navigator.
yS
• Right-click the result data set node in the Post Processing Navigator and select Load.
When you launch a solve, the software creates a file pointer from the solution to the resulting solver
output file. A Results node appears in the Simulation Navigator, and the results are available
to you whenever the Simulation file is loaded.
The result data set appears in the Post Processing Navigator and is named for the active solution.
N
Lesson
Post-processing
Importing results
You can import and access results for solves performed outside of the current set of solutions. The
following file formats are supported for importing results:
Nastran (.op2) I-DEAS Bun file (.bun)
yS
Structures P.E. (.vdm) ABAQUS ODB files (.odb)
ANSYS Structural (.rst) RS2 files (.rs2)
ANSYS Thermal (.rth) LS-DYNA state databases (*.d3p)
ABAQUS (.fil) PERMAS result files (.res, .post)
I-DEAS results file (.unv) Samcef result files (.des, .fac and .sdb)1
Importing results through the Post Processing Navigator
Typically, you import results through the Post Processing Navigator:

• When sharing results of a completed analysis with colleagues.
• To quickly view results without loading the associated FEM and Simulation data.
• To view results created outside NX.
Importing results as an imported solution
You can import results into a Simulation file as an imported solution. For example, if you export
your Simulation, edit the solver input file, and perform a batch or stand-alone solve, you can use
this technique to associate those results with your Simulation. When you reopen the simulation file
in subsequent sessions, you have access to the imported results, and you can load them as you
would any native results file.
N
1. These 3 files must be present to ensure all Samcef results import.

Post-processing
Results types
Results type Description
Element A result value exists for the centroid of each
element.
Nodal A single result value exists for each node.
yS
Element Nodal A result value exists for each node on an element.
If a node is shared between multiple elements,
that node will have multiple result values.
N
Lesson
Post-processing
Post views
A post view represents results displayed on the model in the graphics window. A post view represents
results using a contour or marker display, and includes the result type and data component, cutting
plane settings, deformation, and so on.
yS
You can create multiple post views and overlay them or display them in multiple viewports.
You can save post view settings as templates and apply them to the current post view.
N
Post-processing
Contour plots
Contour plots map results to your model, with results values represented as colors scaled across a
selected spectrum. The following figures show samples of the styles of contour plot available. Each
example illustrated deformation results mapped to the undeformed model.
yS Smooth contour plot
Banded contour plot

N
Element contour plot; external element edges are displayed in this example

Lesson
Post-processing
yS Isoline plot
Isosurface plot
N
Post-processing
Marker plots
A marker plot represents results at nodes or elements using markers that reflect magnitude or
direction. Supported markers include cubes, spheres, arrows, and tensor markers.
yS
Cubes and spheres
Cubes and spheres represent the data magnitude at nodes or element centroids. You can scale the
marker to the result value relative to the model size, and you can use the specified color spectrum
to represent the result magnitude. Cubes and spheres are especially useful for representing scalar
results.
Von Mises stress values at nodes as scaled cubes
Strain energy values as scaled spheres on element centroids on the deformed model
Arrows
N
Arrows are used to represent vector results. You can display the X, Y, and Z vector components,
or you can display arrows as magnitude vectors, representing the direction and magnitude of the
sum of the three components.

Lesson
Post-processing
Tensors
yS
Displacement magnitude vectors as arrows on element centroids. The arrow color and size
are set to Result, and the arrow style is Line.
Tensor markers are used to represent tensor results. The tensor marker depicts the eigenvalues and
eigenvectors of the tensor.
Tensor results for maximum shear stress on element centroids. The tensor style is Box,
and the arrow style is Line.
N
Post-processing
Cutting plane displays

Use cutting planes to create cutaway and cross section displays of results. Cutting plane displays are
useful for visualizing the distribution and direction of results in the interior of solid models.
yS
The cutting plane clip side
To create a cutaway display using cutting planes set the clip side to Positive or Negative. A positive
clip side cuts away the model on the positive side of the selected cut plane axis; a negative clip
side cuts away the model on the negative side.
To create a cross section display, set the clip side to Both.
From left to right: Positive clip side; negative clip side; both sides clipped.
N
Lesson
Post-processing
Deformed model displays

When you create a deformed model display, nodal displacements are initially transformed and
scaled with respect to the origin of the current coordinate system. By default, this is the absolute
coordinate system, but it may also be the work coordinate system or a selected results or model
yS
N coordinate system.

Post-processing
Overlaying post views

You can overlay multiple post views in a single viewport. You can set the post view settings for
each post view independently.
yS
An isoline plot of stress overlaying an isosurface display of displacements on the undeformed
model
N
Lesson
Post-processing
Saving display settings as templates

Post view templates let you apply multiple post view settings in a single operation. Post-view
templates include:
• User-defined templates. You can save your current post view as a post view template. This
yS
template contains all current post view settings. When you apply the template to another post
view, it overwrites all settings for the other post view.
• System templates. NX provides a number of standard post view templates you can use to quickly
apply common contour, deformation, animation, and performance settings.
• Custom templates. You can edit post view templates to define customized, partial post view
templates.
• Sharing templates. An NX administrator can define a library of customized templates. You can
apply these templates to the post views that you create, to ensure consistent and compliant post
displays for reports, presentations, and so on.
N
Post-processing
Identify
To probe and display nodal and elemental information in your post view, use the Identify
command. You can:
yS
• Obtain node and element IDs.
• Display numerical results for nodes and elements.
• List results for selected nodes and elements.
• Write node and element data to either a spreadsheet or .csv file for use defining fields or for
processing outside NX.
N
Lesson
Post-processing
Annotating post-processing displays

To create, edit, and manage persistent annotations for post-processing displays, use the New
Annotation command.
yS
Annotations can contain any text you specify, and may optionally include entity IDs and/or the results
value of the attached node or element.
(1) An annotation attached to a specific node, with user text. (2) Annotations at the three
nodes with highest result value. (3) A free-standing annotation at a specified screen location.
N
Post-processing
Animating results
To generate and control the display of animation frames, use the Animation command.
• You can animate a single result from zero to its maximum value.
yS
• You can animate mode shapes through their full range of motion.
• You can animate a single result across multiple time steps.
• You can animate optimization variables across multiple iterations.
• You can animate flow along streamlines.

N
Lesson
Post-processing
Activities
Post-processing activities:
• Display analysis results — This activity explores how to display results.
yS
See Post-processing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Post-processing
Project
Post-processing — This optional project uses the SOL 101 Linear Statics – Global Constraints
solution sequence to perform a structural analysis and then uses the post processing tools to graph
the results.
yS
N
Lesson
Post-processing
Review questions
1. How do you access the results of an analysis?
2. Is it possible to display more than one result simultaneously?
yS
3. True/False. Mode shapes can be animated through their full range of motion.
N
Post-processing
Summary
• Locate results using the Post-Processing Navigator.
yS
• Create and alter post views.
• Save post view settings in a post view template.
• Animate results.
N
N
yS
Part II: Preparing the geometry
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 8: Geometry idealization
yS
Objective

• Simplify your model before meshing it.
N
Lesson
Lesson 8: 8: Geometry
Geometry idealization
idealization
Geometry idealization is the process of removing or suppressing features from your model prior
to defining a mesh. In addition, you can also use geometry idealization commands to create
features, such as midsurfaces, to support your finite element modeling goals. You can use geometry
yS
idealization commands to:
• Remove features, such as bosses, that aren't significant to your analysis.
• Split a larger body into multiple smaller bodies to facilitate structured meshing.
• Create midsurfaces to facilitate shell meshing of thin-walled parts.
• Modify the dimensions of the idealized part using interpart expressions.
The software performs all geometry idealization operations on the idealized part. No idealization is
performed directly on the master model.
N
Preparing to modify the idealized part

Before you can make any modifications to an idealized part, you must first create an associative copy
of the geometry you want to modify.
Depending on your requirements, there are two different techniques you can use to enable
yS
modifications to the idealized part:
• Use the Promote command to promote selected solid or sheet bodies.
• Use the WAVE Geometry Linker command to create WAVE links for selected solid or sheet
bodies, as well as geometry features such as edges and faces.
Although both commands allow you to tailor the geometry to meet the requirements of a CAE
analysis, there are benefits and limitations to each technique.
N
Lesson
idealization
Promoting solid or sheet bodies

To associatively copy a sheet or solid body from the idealized part into a higher level in the assembly
hierarchy, use the Promote command.
After you promote the body, you can use the geometry idealization commands and Modeling
yS
application commands to add or modify features.
A promoted body remains associated to the history in the master part. If updates occur to the master
part, NX also updates the promoted body in the idealized part.
Advantages of using Promote versus WAVE Geometry Linker
Although WAVE linking geometry can be more robust and versatile, Promote can be simpler
and more straightforward to use, particularly if you do not have a lot of experience working with
assemblies in NX.
N
Linking geometry in the idealized and master parts

The WAVE Geometry Linker command creates associatively linked copies of selected geometry.
There is a direct link between WAVE-linked geometry in the idealized part and the geometry in the
master part. When the geometry in the master part updates, any WAVE-linked geometry in the
yS
idealized part also updates.
Advantages of using WAVE Geometry Linker versus Promote
• You have more control over the geometry that is associatively copied. Promote works only on
bodies, while the WAVE Geometry Linker lets you copy individual faces or collections of faces
in addition to bodies.
• You can control when or if to accept updates to the geometry.
• You can reference the linked data with modeling operations even when the part containing
the defining geometry is not loaded.
N
Lesson
idealization
Creating midsurfaces before meshing

For certain types of parts, you can simplify your geometry for CAE analysis by creating a midsurface
on a solid body. You can then perform your CAE analysis directly on that midsurface, rather than
on the original solid model.
yS
Midsurfaces:
• Let you simplify a model for analysis.
• Are most appropriate for thin-walled parts.
• Can be created either directly on the CAD geometry or on an idealized part.

Note
If you create a midsurface on the idealized part, you must first either promote or WAVE link
a body before you can create a midsurface.
• Contain information about the geometric thickness of the paired surfaces.

N
Selecting appropriate parts for midsurfacing

The midsurface commands are not appropriate for use on all parts. They are primarily intended for
use on the following types of parts:
• thin-walled, tangent-continuous parts
yS
• thin-walled, intersection parts
Thin-walled parts are parts whose thickness can be accurately analyzed using 2D (shell) finite
elements, although the accuracy of the results can depend on the thickness of the part's walls.
Thin-walled, tangent continuous parts
Thin-walled, intersection parts

N
Lesson
idealization
Creating a midsurface by pairing faces

Use the Midsurface by Face Pairs command to define a midsurface on a body by selecting the faces
to pair. The software uses the paired faces to:
• Determine the appropriate size and shape of the midsurface.
yS
• Calculate the thickness values to apply to the midsurface.
The process for creating a midsurface by face pairs
The Midsurface by Face Pairs command:

• Lets you define pairs of faces for a selected solid body.
• Creates a separate mid-sheet for each face pair.
• Extends each individual mid-sheet with respect to the other mid-sheets.
• Trims each individual mid-sheet with respect to the related face pair and the solid body.
Creating the face pairs and generating the mid-sheets on those face pairs is an iterative process. The
Midsurface by Face Pairs dialog box contains a number of tools that you can use to define and
N
modify the face pairs as well as control the mid-sheet creation and trimming.

Split Body
To divide geometry into one or more bodies, use the Split Body command. The geometry can be
either sheet or solid bodies.
Split Body produces an associative feature that appears in the model's history. You can update,
yS
edit, or delete the associative feature.
You can use Split Body to:
• Help prepare complex geometry for meshing. For example, you can use Split Body to subdivide
a larger model into smaller, sweepable regions to facilitate hexahedral meshing.
• Create mesh mating conditions automatically.
• Use color coding to indicate sweepable bodies.
(Left) Part before using Split Body. (Right) Part while using Split Body, with Check for
Sweepable Body selected.
N
Lesson
idealization
Idealize Geometry
To simplify model geometry by removing features from a body or a region of a body that satisfy certain
criteria, or that you explicitly select for removal, use the Idealize Geometry command.
For example, you may want to remove small geometric features that would otherwise cause too
yS
many additional elements to be created. Notice the difference between the mesh in and after
, in which the two holes have been removed:
N
Defeature Geometry
To remove features from a model, use the Defeature Geometry command. When you defeature a
model, you simplify geometry by using selections in the graphics window to remove a face or set
of faces. This is a quick way to remove larger model features such as slots or bosses containing
yS
multiple faces.
To use Defeature Geometry, you must have the idealized part displayed in the graphics window.
To modify the idealized part, you must first either promote or WAVE link the body.
N
Lesson
idealization
Sew
To join sheet bodies or solid bodies, use the Sew command.
You can join:
yS
• Two or more sheet bodies to create a single sheet. If the sheet bodies enclose a volume, the
software creates a solid body.
• Two solid bodies if they share one or more common faces.
Original solid body, with free edges highlighted
Body after using Sew

N
Divide Face
To divide one or more faces of an existing body (or bodies) using multiple dividing objects like
curves, edges, faces, datum planes, and/or solid bodies, use the Divide Face command. The
faces are associative.
yS
You can use Divide Face to create parting edges on models of parts, patterns, molds, or dies.
Original midsurface
Midsurface after using Divide Face. The center rib was used as a dividing object.
N
Lesson
idealization
Activities
Geometry idealization activities:
• Remove features — In this activity, you will remove unnecessary features from the idealized part.
yS
• Mesh a midsurface — In this activity, you will create a midsurface using the face pair method.
• Generate midsurfaces with varying thicknesses — In this activity, you will explore the midsurfacing
techniques in NX by creating a midsurface on a thin-walled part.
See Geometry Idealization in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Project
Geometry idealization — This optional project uses the SOL 101 Linear Statics – Global Constraints
solution sequence to perform a structural analysis on an idealized geometry.
yS
N
Lesson
idealization
Review questions
1. True/False. Geometry idealization is performed in the FEM file.
2. Give three uses for geometry idealization.
yS
3. What command can be used to join sheet or solid bodies?
N
Summary
• Simplify your model before meshing, using several techniques.
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 9: Synchronous modeling
yS
Objectives

• Use synchronous modeling commands to modify a part, in preparation for meshing.
N
Lesson
Lesson 9: 9: Synchronous
Synchronous modeling
modeling
Modifying parts with Synchronous Modeling

To modify a model regardless of its origins, associativity, or feature history, use the Synchronous
Modeling commands in the Modeling application, or when the idealized part or master part is
displayed.
yS
You can use Synchronous Modeling to:
• Resolve inaccuracies such as gaps and sliver surfaces.
• Reduce complexity, such as removing holes and fillets.
• Propose design changes.
• Examine what-if analysis scenarios.
Design revisions can be quickly applied to the finite element model and the CAD model integrity is
maintained.
N
The figure shows part misalignment, which can be corrected using Synchronous Modeling

Preparing to modify the idealized part

Before you can make any modifications to an idealized part, you must first create an associative copy
of the geometry you want to modify.
Depending on your requirements, there are two different techniques you can use to enable
yS
modifications to the idealized part:
• Use the Promote command to promote selected solid or sheet bodies.
• Use the WAVE Geometry Linker command to create WAVE links for selected solid or sheet
bodies, as well as geometry features such as edges and faces.
Although both commands allow you to tailor the geometry to meet the requirements of a CAE
analysis, there are benefits and limitations to each technique.
N
Lesson
modeling
Synchronous Modeling commands

The following is a partial list of the Synchronous Modeling commands.
Copies a face set from the body, keeping the original face set intact.
Copy Face
yS
Pastes a cut face set into a target body.
Paste Face
Copies a face set, mirrors it about a plane, and pastes it into the part.
Mirror Face
For more information on the Synchronous Modeling commands, see the online Help.
N
Deleting faces
To delete faces, use the Delete Face command. You can:

• Automatically heal the open area left in the model by the deleted unwanted faces, by extending
yS
adjacent faces.
• Preserve adjacent blends.
Delete Face is especially useful when modifying an imported model that has no feature history.
N
Lesson
modeling
Moving faces
To move a set of faces and automatically adjust adjacent blend faces, use the Move Face
command.
yS
Because you can make changes directly to the model, regardless of feature history, and without
having to send the model to the original design engineer, this command is also useful in downstream
applications such as Tooling, Manufacturing, and Simulation.
You can use the Move Face command to:
• Relocate a group of faces to a different position to meet design intent.
• Change the bend angle of a sheet metal part that has no history.
• Rotate a face or set of faces about a given axis and about a point. For example, you can change
the angular position of a keyway slot.
• Change the orientation of an entire solid body, regardless of its history, to a different orientation.
N
Adding a volume to a model

To derive a volume from a face region and then modify the model with that volume, use the Pull
Face command.
yS
It retains the area of the pulled face and does not modify the adjacent faces
Although similar to the Move Face command, Pull Face adds or subtracts a new volume, while Move
Face modifies an existing volume.
N
Lesson
modeling
Workflow for creating and updating a mesh

1. Open a model in NX.
2. In the Advanced Simulation application, display the FEM file.
yS
3. Mesh the model.
4. Display the idealized part or the master CAD part.
5. Use Synchronous Modeling to modify the part.
6. Redisplay the FEM file.
7. Update the mesh.

N
Activity
Modify parts with Synchronous Modeling — In this activity, you will use Synchronous Modeling
commands to update a geometric model for use in a finite element analysis. You will learn how to
update a finite element mesh after the underlying geometry has been changed.
yS
See Synchronous Modeling in the online Help.

N
Lesson
modeling
Review questions
1. True/False. Synchronous modeling enables you to maintain the history of the part.
2. How do you move a set of faces, then adjust the surrounding faces to accommodate?
yS
N
Summary
• How to modify a part using Synchronous Modeling commands.
yS
• How to modify a mesh based on a modified part.
N
N
yS
Lesson 10: Geometry repair
yS
Objectives

• Use Modeling tools to correct problems with geometry.
N
Lesson
Lesson 10:10:Geometry
Geometry
repairrepair
Using NX Modeling commands to repair geometry

For many models, you can use the Advanced Simulation abstraction and idealization commands to
modify geometry.
Sometimes, however, you need the tools available in Modeling. For example:
yS
• The abstraction tools are not intended for creating complex geometry features. For example, if
your geometry is missing complicated faces after importing external CAD geometry from STEP or
IGES, you can use the Modeling tools to recreate them.
• When you use abstraction commands, modifications are not retained in the model history. CAD
features and repairs are history-supported when you use modeling commands.
Free-form modeling is commonly used to repair geometry problems. Free-form modeling uses 3D
curve and surface creation to create shapes that are difficult to build using standard features.
N
Geometry repair
Understanding CAD issues reported during FEM creation

When you create a FEM file, the software uses the facets from the CAD geometry faces to create
the polygon geometry that is used in a FEM file in Advanced Simulation. However, in some cases,
there may be issues with the CAD geometry's facet data. Problems with the CAD facet data can
yS
occur for a variety of reasons. For example:
• They can occur when you import geometry you created in a different CAD system into NX. In
these cases, the software may introduce local tolerances to account for misaligned geometry.
• They can occur from NX CAD operations, such Sew or variable radius blends, that approximate
the input geometry with “tolerant” edges. While “precise” edges lie between two adjacent faces
within the floating-point tolerance (0.00001 mm), tolerant edges typically have tolerances
between 0.01 and 0.001 mm.
CAE operations, however, have different requirements for facet data than Modeling operations.
Specifically:
• A model must be fully stitched or “watertight” (have no free edges, no internal cracks, and no
voids) for you to generate a mesh. Although a CAD model may appear to be fully stitched when
you visually inspect the model, there may still be issues at the facet-level that result in free edges.
• All edges must be precise edges for CAE analysis. Tolerant edges are not valid for CAE
operations.
Note
You can use the Examine Geometry command in Modeling (on the Analysis menu) to identify
issues with the CAD geometry before you create a FEM file.
N
Lesson
Geometry
repairrepair
Repairing a model with the FEM is created

When you create a FEM file, the software tries to create polygon geometry that meets the
requirements of a CAE analysis. As it creates the polygon geometry, the software evaluates the
quality and consistency of the CAD facet data. When the software encounters problems with the
yS
facet data, it reports the issues to the syslog files and may ignore the associated faces. Once it has
generated the polygon geometry, the software tries to repair any gaps or voids caused by ignoring the
problem faces. During the repair process, the software tries to:
• Stitch together any free edges by replacing or collapsing curves.
• Fill any void areas with facets based on the maximum area plane. The software uses the color
blue to indicate these areas.
• Resolve consistency issues between facets, facet points, and the edge-face topology.
The goal of the repair process is to create a fully stitched model. However, the software is not always
able to automatically repair the polygon geometry.
N
Geometry repair
Repairing problems
You can use 3D curve and surface creation commands to create shapes that would be difficult to
build with standard features.
For example:
yS
• To remove an existing problem face from a body, use the Unsew command (Home
tab→Feature group).
• To combine faces or add faces to a body, use the Sew (Feature group) or Patch
(Feature group) commands.
After each repair, check for free edges using the Sheet Boundaries option in the Examine Geometry
dialog box (Analysis tab→Relation group).
N
Lesson
Geometry
repairrepair
Viewing features in the Part Navigator

In the Part Navigator in Modeling, you can view the features in your work part in a timestamp order
or by dependencies. The timestamp order is turned on by default.
In the normal viewing mode:
yS
• All bodies in the work part, along with their features and operations, are shown in the main panel.
• You can expand or collapse feature nodes.
Part Navigator
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Sketch (1) “SKETCH_000”
Extrude (2)
Extrude (3)
Block (4)
Unite (5)
Extrude (6)
Fixed Datum Plane (11)
When Timestamp Order is turned on:

• All features in the work part appear in a history list of nodes in the order of their creation
timestamp.
• You cannot expand or collapse feature nodes to see their parents.
• You cannot view all node types that you would see in the normal mode.
Part Navigator
Unused Items
N
Reference Sets
Model
Solid Body “Block (4)”
Block (4)
Unite (5)
Solid Body “Extrude (3)”

Geometry repair
Extrude (2)
Sketch (1) “SKETCH_000”
Sheet Body “Extrude (6)”
Extrude (6)
yS
Block (4)
N
Lesson
Geometry
repairrepair
Creating surfaces using 3D curves

3D curves may be required to define new boundaries for surface creation.
For example, you could reduce the complexity of a single complex face by building it with many faces.
yS
To create 3D curves, in the Modeling application, use the commands on the Curve tab and the
options in the Curve group.
N
Geometry repair
Surface creation commands

To create new surfaces, you can use the following Modeling commands.
Creates a body through multiple sections where

Through Curves the shape changes to pass through each section.
yS
Creates a body through a mesh of sections in one
Through Curve Mesh direction, and guides in another direction, where
the shape fits through the mesh of curves.
Creates a surface enclosed by a set of
N-sided Surface end-connected curves.
Trims off a portion of a sheet body using curves,
Trim Sheet faces, or a datum plane.
Trims or extends a set of faces by distance or to
Trim and Extend the intersection with another set of faces.
N
Lesson
Geometry
repairrepair
Surface addition and removal commands

To add or remove surfaces, you can use the following Modeling commands.
Combines sheet bodies by sewing common edges together, or

Sew combines solid bodies by sewing common faces.
yS
Unsews faces from a body.
Unsew
Modifies a solid or sheet body by replacing faces with the faces
Patch of another sheet.
Creates a body by copying a face, a set of faces, or another
Extract Geometry body.
N
Geometry repair
Activity
Repair imported geometry — In this activity, you will use free-form modeling commands to create a
solid body from imported surfaces.
yS
See the Modeling online Help.

N
Lesson
Geometry
repairrepair
Review questions
1. True/False. Geometry repair uses modeling tools on either the master or idealized part.
2. What commands are used to identify free edges of sheet bodies?
yS
N
Geometry repair
Summary
• Identify problems with geometry that will be used in Advanced Simulation.
yS
• Use Modeling tools to correct problems with geometry.
N
N
yS
Lesson 11: Geometry abstraction
yS
Objectives

• Understand the difference between geometry abstraction and geometry idealization.
• Use geometry abstraction techniques to improve the quality of your geometry for meshing.
N
Lesson
Geometry abstraction
abstraction
Polygon geometry
When you create a FEM file, if you select the Associate to Master Part option in the New FEM
dialog box, the software automatically creates polygon geometry from the geometry in your CAD
model. The polygon geometry is a faceted representation of the geometry in the master part. Polygon
yS
geometry allows you to:
• Tailor the geometry to fit the needs of your CAE analysis without modifying the CAD part. This
means you can make changes to the polygon geometry even though you may not own the
CAD part.
• Repair issues with the CAD geometry, such as eliminate narrow regions, that can prevent the
software from meshing or solving your model.
N
Comparing geometry idealization and geometry abstraction

Geometry idealization and geometry abstraction operations are similar in their intent. Both allow you
to specifically tailor the geometry to the needs of your analysis. However, the two are fundamentally
distinct processes that operate on different aspects of your model.
yS
You perform geometry idealization operations on the idealized part. Geometry idealization lets you
simplify and streamline your model, for example, by removing or suppressing unnecessary features.
For example, you can:
• Add features to the idealized part to facilitate the analysis.
• Split a larger volume to facilitate the meshing of that volume.
• Create a midsurface on a thin-walled part to facilitate 2D meshing.
You perform geometry abstraction operations on the polygon geometry within the FEM file. Geometry
abstraction lets you eliminate issues with the CAD geometry that can cause undesirable results when
you mesh your model. For example, you can use geometry abstraction commands to:
• Remove very small surfaces or small edges from your model that can degrade element quality in
that region.
• Add geometry to your model for use in the analysis. For example, you can add edges to the
polygon geometry to either control the mesh in that region or to define additional edge-based
loads or constraints.
N
Lesson
abstraction
The geometry abstraction process

To abstract the polygon geometry in your FEM file, you can:
• Use the software's automatic abstraction capabilities during 2D or 3D meshing.
yS
• Use Auto Heal and other manual cleanup commands to manually abstract your model.
These commands are in the Home tab→Polygon Geometry group.
Whether you choose to perform the abstraction during meshing or by using Auto Heal, the abstraction
process is the same. In both cases, the software searches your model for geometric features that are
so small that they can prevent the software from being able to mesh or solve your model.
N
(Top) Original geometry; (Bottom) Geometry after using Auto Heal

Automatically abstracting geometry during meshing

During the 2D or 3D meshing process, the software has the ability to prevent problems by:
• Removing edges that are shorter than the specified small feature tolerance. This prevents the
software from creating an element with a very short edge on that portion of the geometry.
yS
• Removing sliver faces whose width (W) is smaller than the specified small feature tolerance.
• Eliminating highly pinched regions of the geometry. A pinched region is a very narrow region of a
surface whose width is smaller than the specified small feature tolerance.
N
(Top) Sliver face in geometry. (Bottom) The mesh, which does not include the sliver face.

Lesson
abstraction
yS
(Top) Pinched region in geometry. (Bottom) The mesh. The pinched region was absorbed into
adjacent geometry.
N
Splitting an edge
To split a single edge into two separate edges, use the Split Edge command.
You may want to split an edge to:
yS
• Define separate boundary conditions on different portions of an edge.
• Prepare to split a face.
(Top) Edge split before meshing; (Bottom) A higher mesh density defined along the center
edge
N
Lesson
abstraction
Splitting a face
To divide a selected polygon face into two separate faces, use the Split Face command.
You can use this command to:
yS
• Add an edge to divide a face so that you can apply an edge-based load.
• Divide an irregular face into several smaller faces on which you can define mapped meshes.
• Restore an edge that was previously removed by the Merge Face or Auto Heal Geometry
commands, or by the automatic abstraction that occurs during meshing.
(Top) Original face; (Bottom) Face after using Split Face

N
Merging edges
To merge two edges together at a selected end-of-edge location, use the Merge Edge command.
You may want to merge edges to:
yS
• Create a larger or more continuous boundary edge prior to meshing.
• Recombine edges that you previously divided with the Split Edge command.
(Top) One edge selected; (Middle) A second edge selected and merged with the first edge
(Bottom) The mesh after using Merge Edge
N
Lesson
abstraction
Merging faces
To merge two polygon faces into a single polygon face along a common polygon edge, use the
Merge Face command.
yS
You may want to merge polygon faces to:
• Create larger faces prior to meshing.
• Recombine faces that you previously divided with the Split Face command.
(Top) Original part; (Bottom) After using Merge Face

N
Stitching edges of midsurfaces
To stitch edges to other edges or faces, use the Stitch Edge command.
Stitch Edge is particularly useful for eliminating free edges that can occur when you create a
yS
midsurface on a thin-walled part. You can also use Stitch Edge to repair small gaps or cracks
between surfaces in your model.
(Top) Original free edges; (Bottom) Edges after using Stitch Edge
N
Lesson
abstraction
Collapsing an edge to a point

To collapse an edge to either one of its end points or to a specified point along the edge, use the
Collapse Edge command.
yS
• Manually remove very small edges from your model by collapsing them to a point.
• Collapse a selected polygon edge to any point along that edge.
(Top) A very small polygon edge; (Bottom) The edge collapsed to its end point after using
Collapse Edge
N
Suppressing holes in sheet bodies

Some models may contain holes that have little impact on its overall stiffness. In analyses in which
you are interested in the overall behavior of a structure and not the stresses in the vicinity of the holes,
you may want to ignore selected holes to localized concentrations of elements and irregularities in the
yS
mesh. You can use the Suppress Hole command to remove holes from sheet bodies, such
as midsurface sheet bodies. You can remove:
• Selected holes or all holes whose diameter is smaller than a specified threshold value.
• Holes contained within a single face.
• Holes that span multiple faces.
• Both circular and non-circular holes.
(A) shows a 2D mesh on a midsurface sheet body that contains a series of 4 mm holes. (B)
N
shows the updated mesh on the sheet body after the Suppress Hole command was used to
remove all holes with a diameter smaller than 5 mm.
You can use the Suppress Hole command either before or after you create a mesh on the part. If
you use Suppress Hole to remove holes from a face that you have already meshed, you must use
the Update Finite Element Model command to update the mesh.

Lesson
abstraction
Reset
To restore abstracted polygon geometry to its original state, use the Reset command.
yS
• Remove changes you made to the polygon geometry with the geometry abstraction commands
such as Split Face.
• Return the portion of the polygon geometry you select to its original state prior to any
modifications.
The Reset command does not work for changes made with the Stitch Edge command, because
of the way that the Stitch Edge command modifies the polygon geometry. Use the Unstitch Edge
command to undo the Stitch Edge command.
N
Identifying and repairing polygon body problems

Two tools can help you identify and repair problems with polygon geometry:
• To check all polygon bodies in your FEM file for issues, use the CAE Model Consistency
command. If the software identifies problems, it lists the affected polygon bodies by name and
yS
stores the modified bodies in an output group.
• If the software identifies polygon bodies with consistency issues, and the CAD part that is
associated with the current FEM file is loaded, you can fix problems using these options in the
Simulation Navigator: Recreate and Update, Recreate, and Delete.
N
Lesson
abstraction
Activities
Geometry abstraction activities:
• Simplify polygon geometry before meshing — In this activity, you will mesh a simple part to
familiarize yourself with the geometry abstraction tools.
yS
• Stitching midsurfaces before meshing — In this activity, you will learn the process for stitching
a model with unstitched surfaces.
See Geometry Abstraction in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Project
Geometry abstraction — This optional project uses the SOL 101 Linear Statics – Global Constraints
solution sequence to perform a structural analysis on stitched geometry.
yS
N
Lesson
abstraction
Review questions
1. True/False. Geometry abstraction occurs in the idealized part file.
2. True/False. During meshing, the software will automatically abstract (eliminate) edges, sliver
yS
faces, and pinched regions smaller than a user-specified small feature tolerance.
3. What command can be used to combine small edges into a larger edge?
4. Give examples of when the Stitch Edge command might be used.

N
Summary
• The difference between geometry idealization and geometry abstraction.
yS
• How to use various geometry abstraction tools to simplify geometry before meshing it.
N
N
yS
Part III: Meshing techniques
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 12: Mesh collectors
yS
Objectives

• Create a mesh collector.
• Use mesh collectors to organize meshes in your model.

N
Lesson
Lesson 12:12:MeshMesh collectors
collectors
Mesh collectors
A mesh collector:
• Contains meshes that share the same properties, such as materials, physical properties, and
display properties.
yS
• Contains only meshes of the same element family. For example, a 3D mesh collector contains
only 3D type elements.
• Allows you to assign the same properties to all meshes within that collector.
Every mesh is assigned to a collector. You first assign a mesh to a collector when you create the
mesh. The collector you assign the new mesh to is called the destination collector. After you create a
mesh and assign it to a destination, you can later reassign that mesh to another collector.
N
Mesh collectors
Mesh collector uses

Use mesh collectors to:
• Work with complex, non-homogenous models, or models based on assemblies.
yS
• Create logical groupings of meshes to help you manage models.
• Display specific areas of the model. You can control visibility by mesh collector.
• Improve performance with large models, because shared properties are stored with the collector
rather than assigned to multiple meshes.
N
Lesson
collectors
Creating a mesh collector

To create a mesh collector, you can:
• Create an empty mesh collector and assign properties to it. You can then make the collector a
destination collector for a mesh that has the same properties.
yS
• Create a mesh collector at the time that you create the mesh. The completed mesh is assigned
to the new collector.
• Create a mesh collector using the automatic creation option. For simple models with few meshes,
the automatic creation option assigns a collector to each mesh. Automatic mesh collectors use
the default physical properties and inherit the material properties of the solid model. You can later
edit the automatic mesh collector to assign specific physical and material properties.
You can view and manage mesh collectors using the Simulation Navigator. Collectors are grouped
by 0D, 1D, 2D, or 3D element types.
N
Mesh collectors
Managing mesh properties with mesh collectors

You can use mesh collectors to manage mesh properties in two ways:
• You edit mesh properties at the collector. Changes to the mesh collector properties are inherited
by all meshes contained in the collector. Collectors facilitate the management of overrides and
yS
the re-use of FE models for multiple analyses.
• You can define mesh display properties for collectors, such as element color, shrink percentage,
and so on. All meshes contained in the collector inherit the display properties of the collector.
When you reassign a mesh from one collector to another, the mesh's display automatically
updates to show the new display properties.
N
Lesson
collectors
Overriding physical properties

In the Simulation file, you can override the physical properties assigned to the mesh collector
in the FEM file.
If you have multiple Simulation files, the overrides let you explore how different physical properties
yS
affect the solution results.
You can also create an override in the FEM file, but this workflow is less likely.
To override physical properties, in the Simulation Navigator, right-click the collector and choose
Edit Attribute Overrides.
N
Mesh collectors
Review questions
1. True/False. A mesh collector can contain multiple meshes.
2. True/False. A mesh collector can contain a mix of 1D, 2D, and 3D meshes.
yS
3. True/False. When a mesh is created, it is either assigned to an existing collector or a collector is
automatically created.
N
Lesson
collectors
Summary
• Create mesh collectors.
yS
• Use mesh collectors to organize meshes in your model.
N
Lesson 13: Materials and physical properties
yS
Objectives

• Create a new material.
• Create a new physical property table.
• Assign a material to a mesh collector.
• Use collectors to organize materials and physical properties.

N
Lesson
Lesson 13:13:Materials
Materials and physical
and physical properties
properties
Materials
You can select and define materials and material properties to use in the simulations and mechanisms
you build.
Before you can solve your model, you must have materials assigned to it. You may choose to use a
yS
material inherited from a body, or you can assign a new material to a physical property table that is
used by a mesh collector. Mesh collectors define groups of meshes that share the same material,
physical, and display properties.
Advanced Simulation includes a material library that provides some standard materials. You can also
create new isotropic, orthotropic, anisotropic, fluid, hyperelastic, and gasket materials.
N
Materials and physical properties
Material types
In NX, you can define the following material types:
• An Isotropic solid, which has the same material properties in all directions at a given location
in the structure.
yS
• An Orthotropic solid, which has three orthogonal planes of material symmetry at a given location
in the structure. Composite laminates are an example of such a material. This material can be
defined by nine independent elastic constants in the stress-strain relationships.
• An Anisotropic solid, which has a different properties in each direction at any given location in the
structure. There is no material plane of symmetry associated with an anisotropic material. This
material can be described by 21 independent elastic constants in the stress-strain relationship.
• A Hyperelastic solid, which is used to model materials capable of experiencing large elastic
strain. For an NX Nastran solve, you can choose a general hyperelastic material or use another
type of material model.
• A Fluid, which is used to model liquids or gases.

N
Lesson
properties
Using custom materials

NX includes a library of standard materials, but you can also create new materials. These custom
materials can be stored in a separate material library file as material definitions that you can assign to
any NX model.
yS
Site and User MatML libraries
You can store custom material definitions in two external libraries: a Site library and a User library,
which you can manage independently using customer defaults. This lets you specify a material
library that everyone uses (Site) and a second material library to which only certain users are given
access (User).
You can manage your custom material definitions using the Material Library Manager dialog box.
Local materials
When you assign a material definition to a model, the material is saved as a local material directly in
the current FEM.
N
Material orientation
When using orthotropic or anisotropic materials, you must define a material coordinate system
that is consistent across the mesh.
Shell and solid elements have unique element coordinate systems that are defined by their node
yS
locations and the order in which the nodes are labeled.
Elements in the same mesh can have different element orientations, even if the mesh is planar. You
can define the material orientation independently of the element coordinate systems.
Material coordinate systems on a shell mesh

N
Lesson
properties
Physical property tables

A physical property table is an entity that:
• Stores the physical property data for elements. Physical properties describe the physical qualities
and characteristics of an element, such as thickness or nonstructural mass.
yS
• Is assigned to a mesh collector. A mesh assigned to a collector inherits the physical properties
of the collector.
• Has material properties assigned to it, for most solver types.
To view physical property tables stored in your model, use the Physical Property Tables Manager
.
N
Creating a physical property table

You can:
• Create the physical property table while creating or editing a mesh collector.
yS
• Create a physical property table using the Physical Properties Table Manager. You can then
assign the physical property table to a mesh collector.
Physical property tables are created in the FEM file. You can override a physical property table
definition in the Simulation file.
N
Lesson
properties
Mesh colors
When interrogating large or complex models, you can quickly identify by color which meshes share
the same mesh, mesh collector, physical or material properties, and also detect errors in physical or
material property assignments. You can also distinguish different meshes by color without having to
yS
manually specify the display settings for each mesh collector individually.
For example, when you choose Physical Property Table or Material Property Table from the Color
Basis list, the software assigns the same color to all elements that reference the same property
table. Colors are assigned arbitrarily.
The standard view of the Simulation Navigator shows the colors assigned to meshes. Physical
property colors are shown in the Physical Properties View, and material colors are shown in the
Material View.
Default colors based on mesh collector display

settings
Colors based on physical property tables

N
yS
Colors based on the material property tables
N
Lesson
properties
Defining solver-specific element attributes
Use the Edit Mesh Associated Data option and the Element Modify Associated Data
command to define solver-specific element attributes that are not defined in physical property
yS
tables, such as:
• Material orientation
• Beam section orientation
• Spring stiffness
• Mass and inertia properties
• Shell offsets
The solver and element type determine the attributes that you can define.
Edit Mesh Associated Data defines element attributes for an entire mesh. Modify Element
Associated Data defines element attributes for selected elements or subset of elements within a
mesh.
N
Activity
Define mesh properties with mesh collectors — This activity uses mesh display properties to
distinguish different meshes, and uses property inheritance to perform what-if analysis by moving
meshes among collectors with different defined materials.
yS
See also:
• Perform a finite element analysis in Advanced Simulation (Introduction to Advanced Simulation
lesson) This activity takes advantage of default values and inheritance to create a mesh collector
automatically.
• Define constraints using local coordinate systems (Boundary condition techniques lesson) —
This activity walks you through the process of predefining multiple materials, physical properties,
and mesh collectors prior to meshing the model.
See Mesh collectors in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
properties
Review questions
1. True/False. A material is assigned to a mesh collector.
2. Name three material types.
yS
3. True/False. You can use physical property tables to assign colors to your model.
N
Summary
• Create a new material.
yS
• Create a new physical property table.
• Assign a material to a mesh collector.
• Use collectors to organize materials and physical properties.

N
N
yS
Lesson 14: Element size and mesh density
yS
Objectives

• Set element size.
• Set the density of elements on selected meshes or faces.

N
Lesson
Lesson 14:14:Element
Element size mesh
size and and mesh density
density
Setting element size

To control the length of elements in either a free or a mapped mesh, use the Element Size option on
the meshing dialog boxes. This length is the approximate length of an element's edge.
Because the software takes into account the surrounding geometry as well as element quality issues,
yS
the actual length of element edges in your model may vary.
To have the software compute an estimated element length based on the selected geometry, use the
Automatic Element Size option on the meshing dialog boxes.
Element length measured on (A) 1D or beam elements; (B) 2D or shell elements; (C) 3D or
solid elements
N
Element size and mesh density
Transitioning element size from local to global

To gradually transition the size of elements from local element sizes back to the global element
size, use the Transition Element Size option.
To create the transition, the software gradually increases the size of the elements in each successive
yS
layer of elements until the element size matches the defined global size.
For parts with a small curves and a large surface-to-volume ratio, using Transition Element Size
with a high Surface Curvature Based Size Variation percentage may result in a uniformly smaller
element size, rather than a greater variation in mesh size. If Transition Element Size results in an
unacceptably large number of elements, turn this option off.
N
Lesson
Element size mesh
density
Controlling local mesh density (Mesh Controls)

To create edge and face densities for free and mapped meshes, use the Mesh Control command.
Edge and face densities give you local control over the number and distribution pattern of elements
along a particular edge or across a particular face.
yS
You can use Mesh Control to create edge and face densities either before or after you have
generated the mesh.
N
Mapped Hole mesh controls

The Mapped Hole type of Mesh Control produces structured rows of elements around specified
holes or loops. You can specify:
• The number of layers (rows) of structured elements that the software creates.
yS
• The spacing of those elements around the edge of the hole.
The following graphic shows the differences in a 2D mesh when a Mapped Hole type of Mesh
Control is used.
(1) shows the initial mesh with no mapped elements around the holes.
(2) shows the updated 2D mesh after a Mapped Hole type of Mesh Control was defined around
each of the four holes. The Mapped Hole definition specified that there should be 3 layers of
structured elements and 8 elements around each hole.
Mapped Hole example

N
Lesson
Element size mesh
density
Fillet mesh controls

Use the Fillet type of Mesh Control to produce a structured mesh of elements along the length of a
fillet, blend, or rounded surface. You can create Fillet type mesh controls to ensure that NX produces
more uniform, regular elements along fillets or blends in your model prior to 2D or 3D meshing.
yS
N
Cylinder mesh controls

Use the Cylinder type of Mesh Control to create a structured mesh of elements along the length of a
cylindrical surface. You can create Cylinder type mesh controls to ensure that NX produces more
uniform, regular elements along cylindrical surfaces in your model prior to 2D or 3D meshing.
yS
N
Lesson
Element size mesh
density
Additional mesh control types

Size on Edge Lets you specify the size of elements to create along a
selected edge.
Chordal Tolerance on Edge Lets you create a parametric set of node locations that the
yS
software derives from equations related to the curvature
of the edge or curve.
Biasing on Edge Lets you specify a series of node locations which are more
dense in one region of the edge and more coarse in the
other regions
Size on Face Lets you specify the size of elements to create along a
selected face.
Weld Row Lets you create a structured (mapped) row of quadrilateral
elements along a set of connected edges that define the
location of a weld.
Boundary Layer Lets you define number of layers, first layer thickness, and
height to create a boundary layer mesh on your polygon
body.
N
Activity
Control mesh density — This activity uses mesh controls to fine-tune the size and distribution of
tetrahedral elements.
yS
See Mesh Controls in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
Element size mesh
density
Review questions
1. True/False. If element size is specified, all elements in the mesh will be the same size.
2. What option is available to gradually adjust the element size from a local, highly refined mesh to
yS
a global mesh size?
3. What command is available to specify the number of elements on an edge?

N
Summary
• Set element size.
yS
• Set the density of elements on selected meshes or faces.
N
N
yS
Lesson 15: Beam modeling
yS
Objectives

• Prepare a model for beam meshing.
• Generate a 1D mesh.
• Define beam cross sections.
• Orient and offset beam cross sections.
• Request element force output.
• Display results for beam models.

N
Lesson
Lesson 15:15:BeamBeam modeling
modeling
Preparing geometry for beam modeling

You can create a 1D mesh on polygon edges in the FEM file; however, in most cases it is preferable
to create associative points and curves in the master or idealized part file to better define node
locations and beam positions.
yS
Advanced Simulation provides a selection of curve-creation commands when a part file is displayed.
Some helpful commands include:
• Menu→Insert→Model Preparation→Point — Use the Point command to define end points
and node locations.
• Menu→Insert→Curve→Basic Curves — Use the Line option to connect snap points or existing
points.
N
Beam modeling
Creating a 1D mesh
To create a mesh of one-dimensional elements that are associated with geometry, use the 1D Mesh
command. You can create or edit one-dimensional elements along curves or polygon edges.
yS
1D elements have the following characteristics:
• They are two-noded elements which, depending on type, may or may not require an orientation
component.
• They represent rod and beam behavior.
• They have stiffness along a line or curve between nodes.
• They are typically used for beam structures, stiffeners, and trusses.
Beam elements have cross sections. You define these cross sections using the 1D Element Section
command, and then assign physical properties to the cross sections.
N
Lesson
modeling
Ensuring consistent 1D element orientation

In the 1D Mesh dialog box, you can use the Auto Chain Selection option to ensure that the beam
elements are:
• Correctly oriented.
yS
• Properly connected from start to end so that the B node of one element connects to the A node
of the next element.
• Numbered sequentially.
Every edge or curve has a defined mesh direction. When you create a mesh of 1D elements, the
direction of the curve controls the direction in which the software generates the 1D elements.
(A) Inconsistent edge directions; (B) Inconsistent mesh

N
(C) Selected using Auto Chain Selection; (D) Consistent mesh direction

Beam modeling
Creating beam cross sections

You can create a cross section and assign it to a mesh of 1D bar or beam elements with the 1D
Element Section command. To create a cross section, you can:
yS
• Choose from a list of solver-specific standard sections and specify the section dimensions.
• Create a cross section from the face of a solid.
• Create a cross section from sketch geometry.
After you create a section, you assign it to a 1D mesh in the physical property table for the mesh
collector.
You can orient the cross section on the bar or beam mesh by specifying an orientation vector and
offsets in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box.
N
Lesson
modeling
Workflow for defining beam cross sections

1. Create the beam cross section.
In the 1D Element Cross Section dialog box, define the beam cross section.
yS
2. Assign the cross section to the 1D mesh.
In the Physical Property Table Manager dialog box for the 1D mesh, assign the cross section.
3. Orient the cross section on the 1D mesh.

In the Mesh Associated Data dialog box, orient the cross section on the 1D mesh.
4. Define offsets.
In the Mesh Associated Data dialog box, use an offset to adjust the distance of the cross section
relative to the 1D mesh.
N
Beam modeling
Defining cross section orientation and offset

You modify a cross section's orientation and offset by editing the mesh associated data for the mesh.
• Orientation refers to the alignment of the cross section's coordinate system with respect to the
element coordinate system.
yS
You can modify the orientation by aligning the cross section's Y or Z axis to a specified vector.
• Offset refers to the relative position of the cross section with respect to the mesh.
You can modify the section offset by aligning a point on the cross section with a location on
your model.
N
Lesson
modeling
Displaying beam cross sections

There are several options for controlling the persistent display of cross sections for 1D meshes:
• Persistent solid display of cross sections.
yS
• Persistent wireframe display of cross sections.
• Individual display controls for cross section orientation, end releases, and orientation vectors.
You control these display options for 1D meshes on the Mesh Display dialog box.
N
Beam modeling
Setting up persistent solid cross section display

To render beam elements as solids, choose the Solid option from the Display Section list in the
Mesh Display dialog box. The software extrudes section geometry along the length of the element.
You can use a solid cross section display to:
yS
• Identify issues with beam orientation or section definition.
• Provide a more realistic rendering of the model.
A beam mesh with a solid cross section display

N
Lesson
modeling
Setting up persistent wireframe cross section display

When you choose Curves from the Display Section list in the Mesh Display dialog box, the software
creates a persistent wireframe display showing cross section geometry at each node of your mesh.
You can use a wireframe cross section display to:
yS
• Select nodes or underlying geometry.
• Conserve system resources.
The beam mesh with a wireframe cross section display

N
Beam modeling
Requesting force output

By default, Advanced Simulation does not include element force output requests in a standard
structural solution. When defining the solution for models containing beams, be sure to request
element force output in your solution. The post-processor uses element forces to:
yS
• Derive beam force and moment resultants.
• Calculate complete beam stresses.
• Display results on beam cross sections.
How you include a force output request varies according to your solver.
Using NX Nastran as your solver, create or edit a Structural Output Requests modeling object.
Click the Force tab, and select Enable FORCE Request.
N
Lesson
modeling
Beam post-processing
Beam stresses vary both over the length of the beam element and across the cross section. You can
display beam stresses in two ways:
• By creating a deformed line display of stresses along a prescribed cross-sectional location
yS
known as a stress recovery point (or at the minimum or maximum of all recovery points) as it
varies along the length of a beam.
• By creating a contour display of stresses across beam sections at the fore or aft end of the beam.
N
Beam modeling
Calculating beam stresses

Structural FE solvers do not output a complete set of stress components for beam elements. This
means:
• Stress datasets based on solver output are incomplete.
yS
• Derived results such as von Mises stress may be inaccurate.
• Many stress component datasets listed in the Post Processing Navigator are empty.
For a complete set of stress components, the software can calculate the stresses from element
forces and beam geometry.
To calculate the stress components, on the Set Result dialog box, select Calculate Beam Results
from Forces and Beam Geometry.
N
Lesson
modeling
Stress calculation process

When you request calculated beam stresses, the software:
1. Queries the results file for material properties (Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio) and section
definition.
yS
If that information is not available in the results file, the software queries the model.
2. Retrieves element force results from the current load case or iteration.
3. Generates an adaptive mesh on each section, and then computes the stress components at each
node in the mesh. Derived stresses such as von Mises stress are also calculated for each node.
4. Retains stresses at nodes closest to the original stress recovery points.
A progress bar is displayed in the Status line while the calculation takes place. For large models
containing many section definitions, the calculation may take a few moments.
N
Beam modeling
Displaying results on cross sections

You can display stress and strain contours on specified beam cross sections.
To display stress contours on beam sections, you must have beam resultants in your results file.
To calculate beam resultants, be sure to include an element force request in your solution output
yS
requests.
To create a cross-section display:
1. Create a standard post view of your model.
2. Click the Cross-Section View command.
3. Select an element and specify the fore or aft end.
Tip
Select Preview to help you refine your selection before generating a cross-section view.
4. Select options to further refine your display.
The software generates an adaptive mesh on the beam section geometry and calculates stresses
from element forces, material properties, and beam geometry.
N
Lesson
modeling
Adding fillets to cross sections

On the Set Result dialog box for your cross-section view, you can select Add Fillets to add fillets to
interior corners of your beam section geometry. The software:
• Multiplies the Fillet Radius Scale Factor by the minimum beam wall thickness to determine
yS
the fillet radius.
• Modifies the section geometry.
• Remeshes the section
• Recalculates stress components.
Adding fillets can reduce artificial stress concentrations at interior corners.

N
Top: Section view without fillets. Note stress concentrations at arrows. Bottom: Section view
with added fillets. Artificial stresses are reduced.

Beam modeling
Activities
Beam modeling activities:
• Create a mesh with beam elements — In this activity, you will learn how to prepare a model
for beam meshing, define cross sections, generate 1D meshes, and modify beam orientation
yS
and offset.
• Display results for a beam model — In this activity, you will learn how to request force output for a
beam solution, calculate complete beam stresses from element forces and geometry, examine
beam stress components, generate cross-section displays, and add fillets to cross sections.
See 1D Meshing and Beam post-processing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Lesson
modeling
Review questions
1. True/False. In Advanced Simulation, you can specify solver-specific standard cross sections.
2. True/False. To modify the orientation and offset of beam elements, edit the mesh collector for
yS
the mesh.
3. A force output request is required in your solution in order to obtain which of the following results:
a. Beam forces and moments.
b. Complete stress components.
c. Contour plot of stress acting over the cross-section.
d. All of the above.

N
Beam modeling
Summary
• Prepare the model for beam modeling.
yS
• Generate a 1D mesh.
• Define beam cross sections.
• Orient and offset beam cross sections.
• Request element force output.
• Display results for beam models.

N
N
yS
Lesson 16: Connecting meshes
yS
Objectives

• Join meshes with mesh mating.
• Join meshes with 1D connections.

N
Lesson
Lesson 16:16:Connecting
Connecting meshes
meshes
Mesh mating conditions

To connect individual 2D or 3D meshes together at a specified interface, use the Mesh Mating
Condition command. The software ensures that connectivity is maintained at that interface.
yS
For example, you can use Mesh Mating Condition to:
• Connect the meshes on similar bodies within an assembly.
• Create identical meshes on two faces to facilitate contact definition.
You can only use the Mesh Mating Condition command to connect meshes between bodies. You
cannot use Mesh Mating Condition to connect mesh mating conditions within a single body.
When you create a mesh mating condition, the software adds it to the Connection Collectors
in your FEM file in the Simulation Navigator.
N
Connecting meshes
Setting mesh mating condition types

The Mesh Mating Condition Type list on the Mesh Mating Condition dialog box controls the type of
connection that you can create between bodies. You can choose from the following types.
yS
• With a Glue Coincident condition, the software makes both geometry and the meshes
match between the source and target faces.
• With a Glue Non-Coincident condition, the software creates connections between the
meshes on the source and target faces.
• With a Free Coincident connection, the software aligns the meshes on the source and target
faces. The software does not create any connections between the meshes.
N
Lesson
Connecting meshes
meshes
Connections
Use 1D connections to:
• Connect component FEMs within an assembly FEM.
yS
• Connect multiple sheet and solid bodies within a FEM.
• Model pins and bolts.
• Distribute mass, loads, or constraints.
• Define connection points for flexible body analysis.

N
Connecting meshes
Geometry-based 1D connections
The 1D Connection command supports both geometry-based and FE-based connections.

Geometry-based connection types include:
yS
• Point to Point
• Point to Edge
• Point to Face
• Edge to Edge
• Edge to Face
You can define geometry-based 1D connections before or after you mesh the polygon bodies to be
connected:
• If you define 1D connections on unmeshed geometry, the software creates a connection recipe,
which is shown in the Simulation Navigator under the Connection Collectors node. The
connection is displayed in the graphics window using a generic connection symbol.
• When you subsequently mesh the polygon geometry, the software generates 1D elements of
the appropriate type, using nodes defined in the geometry mesh. These 1D meshes are shown
in the Simulation Navigator under the 1D Collectors node.
• If you define 1D connections on meshed geometry, the software creates both the connection
recipe and the 1D meshes simultaneously.
N
Lesson
Connecting meshes
meshes
FE-based 1D connections
The 1D Connection command lets you create FE-based 1D connections. This type of connection
is useful when you require precise control of node location or when the underlying geometry is not
available. However, FE-based connections may not be updated correctly if the geometry or mesh
yS
is modified.
FE-based connection types include:
• Node to Node
• Element Edge to Element Face
Node-to-node connection distributing a lumped mass on an imported mesh

N
Connecting meshes
Connecting edges and faces

To connect a set of edges to a set of faces, use the Edge to Face (geometry-based) or Element
Edge to Element Face (FE-based) connection type.
Use this feature to connect meshes in a T-junction configuration, for example, to attach fins or
yS
stiffeners to surfaces.
If you are using the Nastran solver, the software projects RBE2 elements from the selected edge
to the selected face, and then uses RBE3 spider elements to tie the projected nodes to nodes on
the face mesh.
N
Lesson
Connecting meshes
meshes
Connecting points and nodes

You use point-to-point (geometry based) and node-to-node (FE-based) connectors to connect nodes
or points on one body or component FEM to nodes or points on another body or component FEM.
Typical uses for these connection types include:
yS
• Modeling structures such as pins, bolts, or struts.
• Creating spider elements for distributing masses or loads.
• Joining meshes when edge-to-edge or edge-to-face connections are not appropriate. For
example, you can use node-to-node connections to join imported meshes with no underlying
geometry.
One-to-one, point-to-point beam element

N
Connecting meshes
Defining spider element connections

A spider type of connection is one in which you connect a single node (the core node) to multiple
nodes (leg nodes) with a rigid or constraint element. The types of elements you can use to create a
spider connection depends upon your specified solver.
yS
When you create a spider connection:
• The first point you select becomes the core node.
• The selected edge or face define the locations of the leg nodes. A group of smart selection
methods is available on the Top Border bar to help you select the leg nodes.
After you create the spider connection, you can make specific degrees of freedom active or inactive
by editing the element attributes.
N
Lesson
Connecting meshes
meshes
Working with RBE2 and RBE3 elements

In NX Nastran, RBE2 and RBE3 elements are frequently used as spider elements.
RBE2 elements
yS
The active degrees of freedom of the single core node (independent) enforce the active degrees of
freedom of the leg nodes (dependent). Therefore, the active degrees of freedom of all nodes included
in an RBE2 element are considered rigidly connected.
(1) independent node (2) dependent nodes
RBE3 elements
The weighted average of the active degrees of freedom of the leg nodes (independent) enforces the
active degrees of freedom of the single core node (dependent). This weighting is set to 1 and cannot
be changed in NX; all nodes contribute to the motion equally. Unlike the RBE2, the RBE3 element is
flexible (not infinitely rigid), due to the allowable freedom of the leg nodes. Common uses for this
element type include adding and distributing mass without adding stiffness, and distributing a load
from multiple points to a single point.
N
(1) dependent node (2) independent nodes

Connecting meshes
Activities
Connection activities:
• Connect meshes with mesh mating — In this activity, you will create mesh mating conditions to
connect meshes in layers of a part.
yS
• Connect nodes with spider elements — In this activity, you will create spider elements in holes.
The spider elements provide a place for a load to be applied.
See Connecting meshes in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
Connecting meshes
meshes
Project
1D connections — This optional project uses the SOL 101 Linear Statics – Global Constraints solution
sequence to determine the amount a shaft twists.
yS
N
Connecting meshes
Review questions
1. What two mesh mating condition types create aligned meshes on the source and target faces?
2. Does a Free Coincident mesh mating condition connect the meshes?
yS
3. If 1D connections are created on meshed geometry, does the software create a connection
recipe?
4. The core node for a mesh of RBE2 elements displaces 1 mm in the X direction. What is the
displacement of the leg nodes?
5. The core node for a mesh of RBE3 elements displaces 1 mm in the X direction. What is the
displacement of the leg nodes?
N
Lesson
Connecting meshes
meshes
Summary
• Join meshes with mesh mating.
yS
• Join meshes with 1D connections.
N
Lesson 17: Bolt modeling and pre-loads
yS
Objectives

• Model a bolted connection.
• Apply bolt pre-loads to a 1D bolt model.
• Apply bolt pre-loads to a 3D bolt model.
• Display stresses resulting from bolt pre-loads and service loads.

N
Lesson
Lesson 17:17:Bolt modeling
Bolt modeling and pre-loads
and pre-loads
Modeling bolted connections

Use the Bolt Connection command to model the following types of bolted connections with finite
elements:
• A bolt that is held in place with a nut.
yS
• A bolt in a tapped (threaded) hole.
• A bolt-type connection that is represented by only a spider element at the junction plane between
two mating bodies.
With Bolt Connection, how the software models the bolt depends on your specified solver
environment. Typically, 1D elements are used to model the bolt's shank. To connect those 1D
elements to the nodes in the surrounding mesh, the software creates a spider-type connection.
The following graphic shows a model with the bolt connections generated in the bolt holes. RBE3
elements connect the CBAR elements along the bolt's shank to the CTETRA elements in the
components' meshes.
N
Bolt pre-load
A bolt pre-load:
• Is the initial torque applied to a bolt or fastener when it is first tightened.
yS
• Can be applied along with a service load so you can analyze contact conditions that may occur
within the bolt or calculate the stresses resulting from the combination of those loads.
Use the Bolt Pre-Load boundary condition command to apply a pre-load to bolts or fasteners that
you model using finite elements.
General bolt pre-load analysis process
In a pre-loaded bolt analysis, you typically:

1. (1D bolts only) Use the Bolt Connection command to both model the shank of the bolt as a 1D
element and connect that element into the mesh on the surrounding part.
2. Use the Bolt Pre-Load command to define the pre-load itself.
3. Use the appropriate load command to define any service loads to apply to the bolt.
4. Solve the model.

N
Lesson
and pre-loads
Bolt pre-loads with NX Nastran and NX Multiphysics

If you are working with the NX Nastran or NX Multiphysics solvers, you can use the Bolt Pre-Load
command to apply a pre-load to a bolt modeled with certain types of 1D, 2D, and 3D elements.
yS
Key NX Nastran bolt pre-load concepts
NX Nastran and NX Multiphysics use:

• The BOLT bulk data entry to define the beam elements to include in the bolt pre-load analysis.
• The BOLTFOR bulk data entry to define the actual bolt pre-load value.
Bolt preload for NX Nastran SOLs 101, 103, 105, 107 through 112
In the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box:

• Use the Force on 1D elements option to define a pre-load on a bolt that is modeled with CBAR
or CBEAM type beam elements. You select one CBAR or CBEAM element to define the bolt,
even if you modeled the bolt as several elements.
• Use the Force on 3D elements option to define a pre-load on a bolt that is modeled with
CHEXA, CPENTA, or CTETRA elements. You select nodes that form a cross section through
the bolt, and define the bolt axis.
N
Pre-loaded bolts modeled with beam elements

In the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box, you can use the Force on 1D elements option to define a pre-load
on a bolt that is modeled with CBAR or CBEAM type beam elements.
yS
Understanding bolt pre-load analysis process for 1D elements
With the Force on 1D elements option, when you solve your model, NX Nastran first reduces
the stiffness of the beam elements that represent the bolts by the value of the parameter to make
their stiffness insignificant.
The software applies the Force that you specified in the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box to the ends of the
bolts in the axial direction. The software then performs a linear statics analysis to obtain the relative
displacements (U2 and U1) for each pair of nodes.
Selecting the elements that define the bolt
As a best practice, when you select the 1D elements to which to apply the bolt pre-load, you should
select all the beam elements that define the shank of the bolt.
In SOL 101, the software applies the pre-load to the first element you select and ignores any
additional elements you select.
However, SOL 601,106 and SOL 601,129 require that you select all elements along the shank of the
bolt to define the pre-load.
Always selecting all the beam elements that define the shank of the bolt allows you to create a single
bolt pre-load and then use it between the different solution sequences.
N
Lesson
and pre-loads
Pre-loaded bolts modeled with solid elements

In the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box, you can use the Force on 3D elements option to define a pre-load
on a bolt that is modeled with CHEDA, CPENTA, or CTETRA type of solid elements.
yS
Selecting the nodes that define the cross section on the bolt
With the Force on 3D Elements option, you must select a series of nodes that define a cut through
the bolt at any location (1) on the interior of the bolt. You then specify a coordinate system and axis
that NX Nastran uses to define the axis of the bolt (2).
Note
If you select one or more polygon faces to define the cut through the bolt, the software uses all
of the nodes associated with those faces to define the cut.
Understanding the bolt pre-load calculation process for solid elements
• NX Nastran first splits the mesh on the bolt by:

N
o Duplicating each node you selected to define the Force on 3D Elements option.
o Modifying the element connectivity on one side of the cross section to use the new duplicate
nodes.
• NX Nastran adds a weak spring between each pair of nodes with stiffness in the bolt’s axial
direction.
• NX Nastran determines the projected area of the solid elements using the nodes, coordinate
system, and axis you selected in the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box. NX Nastran uses this area to
apply the equivalent bolt pre-load as two equal and opposite face tractions in the bolt axial
direction.

• NX Nastran runs an initial solution with only these face tractions applied to obtain the deflection at
the bolt’s cross section due to the bolt pre-load. NX Nastran uses these deflections to calculate
the initial strain in the bolt.
• NX Nastran then runs a second solution with:
yS
o The initial strain applied.
o The springs removed.
o The service loads applied (if you have included any service loads in the analysis).
N
Lesson
and pre-loads
Activities
Contact and gluing activities:
• Model bolted connections — In this activity, you model a bolt with a beam element and spider
elements. You apply two subcases: one with a bolt pre-load alone, and one with both the bolt
yS
pre-load and service loads.
• Analyze bolt pre-loads on solid elements — In this activity, you explore various techniques to
apply a bolt pre-load to a 3D bolt model.
See Modeling bolted connections and Bolt pre-load in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Review questions
1. True/False. The Bolt Connection command automatically creates an element representing
the shank of the bolt and a pair of spider elements connecting the ends of the shank element
to the surrounding mesh.
yS
2. Identify two types of elements to which you can apply a bolt pre-load.
N
Lesson
and pre-loads
Summary
• Model a bolted connection.
yS
• Model bolt pre-loads on 1D and 3D bolt models.
• Verify bolt pre-loads in results.
• Display stresses resulting from bolt pre-loads and service loads.

N
Lesson 18: 3D swept meshing
yS
Objectives

• Prepare a part for swept meshing.
• Generate a 3D swept mesh.

N
Lesson
Lesson 18:18:3D swept
3D swept meshing
meshing
Creating a 3D swept mesh

To generate a mapped mesh of hexahedral or wedge elements by sweeping a free or mapped surface
mesh through a solid body, use the 3D Swept Mesh command.
yS
Use the Type menu to control how the software sweeps the mesh through the selected bodies.
• The Multi Body-Infer Target and Until Target types sweep a mesh of solid elements through
one or more volumes.
• The Automatic Between and Manual Between types sweep a mesh of solid elements between
volumes.
N
3D swept meshing
Generating a mesh with an inferred target

To sweep a mesh from a selected source face to a target face that the software determines, select
the Multi Body-Infer Target option in the Type list in the 3D Swept Mesh dialog box. You can sweep
the mesh through a single body or through multiple individual bodies. If you select source faces from
yS
multiple bodies, the software sweeps a separate mesh through each individual body.
In the following graphic, (A), (B), and (C) are source faces which belong to different bodies. When the
meshes are generated, notice that NX sweeps a different mesh through each of the bodies.
N
Lesson
3D swept meshing
meshing
Sweeping a mesh to a target face

To sweep a mesh from a selected source face to a target face that you specify, select Until Target
option in the Type list in the 3D Swept Mesh dialog box. There are two primary use cases for the
Until Target option.
yS
• In the first case, select Until Target to sweep a 3D mesh from a source face in one body to a
target face in another body. Any intervening bodies between the source face and the target
face must be contiguous.
In the following graphic, (A) is the source face and (B), at the bottom of the model, is the target
face. NX sweeps the mesh from the source face, through the intermediate bodies, to the target
face.
• In the second case, select Until Target to sweep a 3D mesh from multiple, connected source
faces to a single target face.
In the graphic, (A) shows the source faces on one side of the part, and (B) shows the target
face on the opposite side of the part.
N
3D swept meshing
yS
NX sweeps the mesh of hexahedral elements from the source faces (C) to the target face (D).
N
Lesson
3D swept meshing
meshing
Sweeping a mesh between two solid meshes

To create a structured 3D mesh between two solid meshes, select the Automatic Between or the
Manual Between options in the Type list in the 3D Swept Mesh dialog box. You can use these
options to create a mesh of brick or wedge elements even if you do not have any geometry to define
yS
a body. For example, if you have a set of assembly components that you need to connect, but
you do not have any geometry to represent the connection, you can sweep a mesh of hexahedral
elements between the components.
In the following graphic, (A) shows a pressure vessel that contains a void between the outer housing
and the inner volumes. Because there is no geometry in the void space, we used the 3D Swept
Mesh command with the Automatic Between option to manually sweep a mesh from the interior
face of the outer housing to the inner volumes. (B) shows the two layers of hexahedral elements
that NX generated in the void.
N
3D swept meshing
Sweeping a mesh through a volume

With the Multi Body-Infer Target and Until Target types of swept mesh, the software sweeps a
mesh from the source face through the solid body, to a target face. When the software generates the
swept mesh, it propagates the mesh into the body, layer by layer until the entire solid body is filled
yS
with elements. The mesh on the source face, therefore, controls the mesh through the solid body.
• You can use the 2D Mapped Mesh command to first create a structured seed mesh on the
source face before you use the 3D Swept Mesh command.
• You can use the options in the 3D Swept Mesh dialog box to control the mesh on the source face.
The following example shows a model with an existing free mesh of quadrilateral elements on the
source face (A). The software sweeps these elements through the volume to create solid mesh
of hexahedral elements (B).
N
Lesson
3D swept meshing
meshing
Using Split Body to subdivide a body prior to swept meshing

Before you try to generate a swept mesh on a body, you may first need to simplify the body by
subdividing it into smaller bodies. You can use the Split Body command to divide a complex body into
several smaller, simpler bodies. Additionally, you can use the Check for Sweepable Body option in
yS
N the Split Body dialog box to interactively preview whether the current body is likely to be sweepable.

3D swept meshing
Activity
Generate a hexahedral (swept) mesh — In this activity, you will work through the process for
generating a swept mesh, including splitting the bodies into smaller bodies, generating mesh mating
conditions, and choosing swept meshing options.
yS
See 3D swept meshing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
3D swept meshing
meshing
Project
Swept meshing — This optional project shows how to generate a swept mesh on a more complex
assembly.
yS
N
3D swept meshing
Review questions
1. What type of elements are created from 3D swept meshing?
2. How can you simplify a body before using swept meshing?
yS
N
Lesson
3D swept meshing
meshing
Summary
• Prepare a part for swept meshing using Split Body.
yS
• Generate a 3D swept mesh.
N
Lesson 19: Manual meshing
yS
Objectives

• Create nodes and elements.
• Copy nodes and elements.
• Modify nodes and elements.

N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
Manual meshing
Manual meshing commands let you work directly with nodes and elements. You can use these
commands to:
• Make manual modifications to selected regions of an existing finite element model. For example,
yS
you can use the Drag Node command to reposition individual nodes within your model to
improve aspects of element quality. You can also use commands such as Split Shell to divide
selected 2D elements.
• Build an entire finite element model by creating individual nodes and elements. This method is
known as “bottom up” meshing. This technique is useful in cases where the actual geometry is
not available or, for example, when you can approximate the geometry using beam elements.
Manually generated nodes and elements are not associated to the underlying geometry. If your
geometry is updated, the positions of the manually generated nodes and elements are not updated.
N
Manual meshing
Node creation commands
Creates nodes on selected points.

Node Create
Creates one or more nodes between existing
yS
Node Between Nodes nodes.
Creates nodes on a point, or along an edge or

curve.
Node on Point/Curve/Edge
N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
Node copy commands

Moves a group of nodes a specified distance.
You can either translate the nodes, or copy and
Node Translate
translate the copied nodes.
yS
Rotates nodes through an arc, about a point. You
can either rotate the nodes, or copy and rotate
Node Rotate
the copied nodes.
Reflects nodes across a plane. You can either
reflect a set of nodes to the opposite side of a
Node Reflect
plane, or copy and reflect the copied set of nodes.
N
Manual meshing
Creating an element
To create elements in your model by selecting existing nodes, use the Element Create
command.
yS
For example, you can create a few individual 1D elements to join two different sheet bodies or
solid bodies.
To create an element, you:
• Select the element type, which depends on the solver and analysis type.
• Assign the element to a mesh collector.
• Select nodes to define the element.
The elements that you create with the Element Create command are not associated to the underlying
geometry. If the geometry updates, the software does not update the manually created elements.
N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
Element copy commands

Copies and moves selected elements either a
distance with respect to a coordinate system, or
Element Copy and Translate
along a vector.
yS
Projects 1D or 2D elements along a vector to a
Element Copy and Project target surface.
Creates a symmetrical model by copying
Element Copy and Reflect elements and reflecting them across a plane.
(Top) Original elements; (Bottom) Original and reflected elements

N
Manual meshing
Element extrude and revolve commands

Extrudes element edges or faces in any direction
in 3D space.
Element Extrude For example, you can extrude the face of a
yS
quadrilateral element to create a brick element.
Revolves element edges into 2D elements or
Element Revolve element faces into 3D elements.
(Left) Original mesh of 2D elements; (Right) Mesh of 3D elements after the 2D elements are
extruded along a vector
N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
2D element modify commands

Use the following commands to modify 2D elements to improve mesh quality:
Subdivides quadrilateral 2D elements.

Split Shell
yS
Combines two selected triangular elements into
Combine Triangles a single quadrilateral element.
Repositions the node of a 2D element.

Move Node
(Top) Original quadrilateral element; (Bottom) Resulting triangular elements after using Split
Shell
N
Manual meshing
Node and element management commands

Modifies the label of selected nodes.
Node Modify Label
Modifies the label of selected elements.
yS
Element Modify Label
Lists properties of selected nodes and elements.
Node/Element Information
Deletes nodes.
Node Delete
Deletes elements.
Element Delete
N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
More node and element management commands

Unlocks a locked mesh so it can update.
Unlock Mesh
Assigns a nodal displacement or reference coordinate
yS
Assign Nodal Coordinate system to nodes or geometry.
System
Identifies the nodal displacement or reference coordinate
Nodal Coordinate System system for selected nodes.
Modifies mesh order from linear to parabolic, or parabolic to
Element Modify Order linear.
Extracts elements into new meshes.
Element Extract
N
Manual meshing
Morphing a mesh
Mesh morphing is a process for updating an existing mesh to conform to geometry modifications
without regenerating the entire mesh. When you morph a mesh, the software tries to keep the overall
mesh topology constant. The software computes new locations for the nodes in the existing mesh to
yS
conform to the changed geometry and expands or shrinks the mesh to fit the modified geometry.
Morphing provides an alternative to the mesh update that occurs within the FE Model Update
command. With a mesh update, NX deletes and recreates meshes that are affected by change
to the underlying geometry.
You may want to morph, rather than update, a mesh when:
• It is important that you preserve your current node and element labels.
• You want to retain the shape and size of the existing elements in a mesh in areas that are
unaffected by the modifications to the CAD geometry.
N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
Displaying nodes independently of elements

You can control the visibility of the nodes of a mesh independently of the elements. When you select
the Show and Hide Nodes Independently check box in the Model Display dialog box, you can
then use the standard NX Show and Hide commands to show or hide nodes. For example, you
yS
can place a selection of nodes into a group and then use the Show Only command to display only
that group of nodes, without displaying the elements. This ability gives you more detailed control
over the display of your finite element model.
Note
NX displays nodes in the graphics window only when the Marker Type in the Model Display
dialog box is set to one of the display options such as Asterisk.
Nodes display type in the Show and Hide dialog box
When the Show and Hide Nodes Independently option is selected, the Nodes display type becomes
available in the Show and Hide dialog box. This option lets you show or hide all nodes in the model.
The following graphic shows a model display when the mesh is set to Hide and the nodes are set to
Show in the Show and Hide dialog box.
N
Manual meshing
Activities
Manual meshing activities:
• Generate a mesh without geometry — In this activity, you use some of the manual node and
element commands to improve element quality and create new elements.
yS
• Repair free edges — In this activity, you use manual meshing tools to repair free element edges
and improve node connectivity.
See Manual meshing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
Lesson 19:19:Manual
Manual meshing
meshing
Review questions
1. True/False. An entire finite element model can be created using the manual meshing commands.
2. Discuss how the Split Shell command can be used to improve mesh quality.
yS
3. Discuss how the Combine Triangles command can be used to improve mesh quality.
N
Manual meshing
Summary
• Create nodes and elements.
yS
• Copy nodes and elements.
• Modify nodes and elements.

N
N
yS
Lesson 20: Mesh quality
yS
Objectives

• Check the quality of the mesh before solving.
N
Lesson
Lesson 20:20:MeshMesh quality
quality
Checking your finite element model

NX includes a number of commands that you can use to validate your model. You can use these
commands to:
• Check how well the model’s CAE geometry conforms to the underlying CAD geometry.
yS
• Ensure the quality and consistency of your mesh.
• Validate that the model is complete and ready to solve.

N
Mesh quality
Model check commands

Element Quality Checks Lets you evaluate the quality of elements in your
model based on both general and solver-specific
criteria.
Element Edges Lets you display any 2D and 3D elements with
yS
free edges. Also lets you display any non-manifold
element edges.
2D Element Normals Lets you evaluate the consistency of the 2D
element normals in your model.
Duplicate Nodes Lets you check your model for duplicate nodes
and merge any of those nodes together.
Duplicate Elements Lets you check your model for duplicate elements
and delete any of those duplicates.
Element Material Orientation Lets you display the material orientation of 2D and
3D elements in your model.
Adjust Node Proximity to CAD Lets you adjust the proximity of nodes created
on polygon geometry to the underlying CAD
geometry.
CAE Model Consistency Lets you evaluate the polygon geometry in your
model for consistency issues.
Detect Interference/Clearance Lets you detect regions of interference within your
model.
Finite Element Model Summary Lets you print an informational summary of the
entities in your FEM file.
Simulation Summary Lets you print an informational summary of the
entities in your Simulation file.
Model Setup Lets you evaluate whether your model is ready
to solve.
N
Lesson
quality
Evaluating element quality

Use the Element Quality command to evaluate the quality of the elements. You can:
• Evaluate quality criteria required by certain solvers. For a given quality check, you can specify
separate warning and error limit values. You can also specify different colors to display elements
yS
that violate these limits.
• Select different element quality criteria and specify different quality threshold values depending
on the element’s type.
• Have the software automatically place certain elements into a new group, named OUTPUT
GROUP, in the Simulation Navigator. This group overwrites any existing output group.
N
Mesh quality
Checking for free and non-manifold element edges

Use the Element Edges command to find:
• Free (unconnected) element edges within a 2D mesh. A free element edge is an edge that is
referenced by only one element. Free element edges in the interior of a sheet body, for example,
yS
can indicate regions of your model that are not fully connected (stitched)
• Non-manifold element edges in your model. A non-manifold element edge is an edge that
is shared by more than two element faces. Non-manifold element edges occur when the
underlying geometry is non-manifold. You can use the Stitch Edge command to ensure that the
non-manifold faces are fully stitched together prior to meshing.
The ability to display all non-manifold element edges is helpful when you need to validate that the
faces in your model are fully stitched before you solve. When you examine the areas in your
model where non-manifold faces intersect, you can use the Non-Manifold Edges option to verify
that the elements on those intersecting faces are also stitched together.
Results of Element Edges check. Elements with free edges are shown in magenta, and
N
elements with non-manifold edges are shown in cyan.

Lesson
quality
Checking and orienting the normals of 2D elements

Use the 2D Element Normals command to:
• Display the normals of 2D elements.
yS
• Reverse the normals of 2D elements.
• Change the orientation of selected 2D elements to match the orientation of a specified seed
element.
All 2D elements have a normal (perpendicular) that establishes their top and bottom. Consistent
element normals help ensure the overall quality of your finite element model. For example, consistent
normals are important for:
• Properly defining contact between surfaces.
• Modeling laminate composites.
• Post-processing stress or strain results for 2D elements.
The positive sense of normal direction is determined by the ordering of the nodes that define the
element and the right-hand screw rule. For example, if the nodes are sequentially ordered I, J, K, L
on the element definition, the positive sense of the nodal direction is as follows:
N
Mesh quality
Checking for duplicate elements and nodes

Use the Duplicate Nodes and Duplicate Elements commands to check whether your model
contains any coincident elements or nodes. Coincident elements or nodes are considered duplicates.
• The ability to detect and merge duplicate nodes is particularly useful when you are working with:
yS
o Assembly models.
o Models that contain multiple meshes.
If you try to solve a model that contains coincident nodes, singularities or other rigid body motion
errors can occur during the solve.
• The ability to detect duplicate elements is helpful when, for example, your model contains
multiple 1D connections. You can validate that those 1D connections are defined appropriately
before you solve.
Results of duplicate nodes check

N
Lesson
quality
Displaying an element’s material orientation

After you define the material orientation at the mesh level or element level, you can view the material
coordinate system for each element in the graphics window. Use the Element Material Orientation
command to display the material orientation of 2D or 3D elements in your model.
yS
To indicate the material orientation, the software displays an arrow on each element that indicates
each direction of the material coordinate system.
• For 2D elements, an arrow displays on each element to indicate the X-axis of the material
coordinate system
• For 3D elements, you can view one, two, or three directions of the material coordinate systems.
You can view the first, second, and third directions independently or all three simultaneously.
N
2D material orientation

Mesh quality
Activity
Evaluate mesh quality — In this activity, you will mesh a midsurface and then evaluate the quality
of the elements.
yS
N
Lesson
quality
Review questions
1. True/False. The Element Quality Checks can be used to locate highly distorted elements.
2. True/False. The user can adjust the threshold values of the criteria used to locate highly distorted
yS
N elements.

Mesh quality
Summary
• Check the quality of the mesh before solving.
yS
N
N
yS
Part IV: Boundary condition techniques
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 21: Boundary condition techniques
yS
Objectives

• Display boundary conditions.
• Use a coordinate system to define a boundary condition.
• Resolve constraint conflicts.

N
Lesson
Lesson 21:21:Boundary
Boundary condition
condition techniques
techniques
Organizing boundary conditions in folders

You can create folders to manage your simulation objects, loads, and constraints. For example, for
simulation objects, you can have one folder for contacts, another folder for temperatures, and so on.
In the Simulation Navigator, NX displays the folders in the appropriate boundary condition container:
yS
Simulation Objects Container, Load Container, or Constraint Container.
If you create the simulation objects, loads, and constraints directly in their root containers, you
can individually add them to or remove them from subcases or steps. You can also add top level
folders into a solution step.
N
Boundary condition techniques
Displaying boundary conditions

The boundary conditions display options let you control the symbols used to graphically indicate the
locations of loads and constraints in the graphics window. You can choose whether to display the
boundary conditions with a graphics symbol, text symbol, or both. You can also modify the color or
yS
line weight, scale the size of the symbols, or change the distribution of the symbols on a face.
Use the Edit Display command to modify the display options for individual boundary conditions.
Boundary conditions can appear in these display modes: Collapsed, Expanded, or Offset. Offset is
the default for boundary conditions attached to polygon edges or element edges.
(1) Collapsed display; (2) Expanded display; (3) Offset display
Customer Defaults
You can control the display styles for constraints, loads, and simulation objects separately, using
the customer defaults for boundary conditions.
N
Lesson
Boundary condition
techniques
Creating displays to validate temperature or pressure loads

To generate a contour plot of pressure, nodal pressure, or temperature loading as a standard post
view, use the Plot Boundary Condition Contours command. You can use these contour plots to
verify your loading conditions, to generate high-quality visualizations for reports or presentations, and
yS
to interrogate and extract loading data.
When you generate the contour plot, the Post Processing toolbar is turned on. You can use the
commands on this toolbar to view and interrogate your loading conditions. For example, you can:
• Use the Edit Post View command to modify the loading display
• Use the Identify Results command to probe loading values at nodes and write export them
to a spreadsheet or comma-separated-value file.
(Top) A parametric spatially varying pressure load; (Bottom) The same load as a spherical
marker plot
N
XY plots of boundary conditions

Use the Boundary Condition XY Plot command to generate an XY plot of loads, constraints, and
solver-specific simulation objects that vary with a quantity such as time or temperature. You can use
these plots to verify your loading conditions, to generate high-quality visualizations for reports or
yS
presentations, and to interrogate and extract loading data.
The boundary condition to plot must reside in a dynamic solution and the boundary condition’s
domain must match the domain of the solution. For example, you can plot a force load that is driven
by a time-dependent field if the force load resides in a direct transient solution subcase.
You can plot the overall magnitude of the boundary condition at each iteration value, or plot the
portion of that magnitude that is distributed to a selected location at each iteration value. You can
select a node, element, element edge, or element face, depending on how the boundary condition is
distributed:
When the BC is distributed to... You can select:

Nodes Node
Elements Element
Element faces Element face
N
Element edges Element edge
FEM Element, edge, or face
Corner nodes Node
After you generate the XY plot, you can use the XY Graph commands on the Results tab to change
the display of the graph.

Lesson
Boundary condition
techniques
Simulation coordinate systems

Coordinate systems help you both to perform geometry model operations and to define your finite
element model. Coordinate systems used in Advanced Simulation include:
• The absolute coordinate system
yS
• The work coordinate system (WCS)
• Local coordinate systems
• Nodal coordinate systems
Local and nodal coordinate systems may be (A) Cartesian, (B) cylindrical, or (C) spherical.
Creating additional coordinate systems
You can define additional coordinate systems in the FEM file, the Simulation file or the idealized
part file.
• In the FEM file, use additional coordinate systems during manual node and element creation and
to define nodal displacement coordinate systems.
• In the Simulation file, use additional coordinate systems to define component loads and
constraints.
N
Use the Coordinate System command to define additional coordinate systems.

Absolute coordinate system

The absolute coordinate system has the following characteristics:
• It is defined automatically.
yS
• It is permanent.
• It cannot be moved.
• It is Cartesian.
• It provides the frame of reference for all other coordinate systems.
• It is used when exporting an input file for another solver. The software writes out the location of
each node in the absolute coordinate system.
• It corresponds to the NX Nastran Basic coordinate system.

N
The view triad is circled. It shows the orientation of the absolute coordinate system.

Lesson
Boundary condition
techniques
Work coordinate system (WCS)

The work coordinate system has the following characteristics:
• It can be moved anywhere in model space.
yS
• It is the frame of reference for modeling operations.
• It is used when you create, orient, or examine an FE entity or geometry.

For example, you specify a node's coordinate with respect to the WCS.
The work coordinate system is circled.

N
Local coordinate system

A local coordinate system has the following characteristics:
• It is user-defined.
yS
• It can be referenced when defining component-based boundary conditions.
• It can be Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical.

N
The circled area is a local coordinate system.

Lesson
Boundary condition
techniques
Nodal coordinate system

A nodal coordinate system is a local coordinate system that has been assigned to one or more nodes.
• The nodal displacement coordinate system provides the nodal frame of reference for the
structural degrees of freedom.
yS
Use the nodal displacement coordinate system when you define nodal displacement constraints.
• The nodal reference coordinate system provides the nodal frame of reference for node
coordinates (grid points).
After you assign a nodal reference coordinate system to a set of nodes, you can move those
nodes and the attached elements by repositioning or reorienting the reference coordinate system.
By default, the nodal coordinate system is the absolute coordinate system.
Use the Assign Nodal Coordinate System command to assign a nodal displacement or
reference coordinate system to nodes or geometry..
N
The circled area is a nodal displacement coordinate system.

Excluding objects from boundary conditions

When you define loads or constraints, use the Excluded option to specify geometry or FE entities to
exclude from the boundary condition definition.
For example, you can define a fixed constraint on a polygon face, and exclude the polygon edges.
yS
Use the Excluded option to:
• Avoid conflicts in constraints applied to shared geometry. You can prevent the software from
creating a constraint along edges that are shared between faces.
• Apply a load to geometry and exclude selected elements. You can then apply a different load
to the excluded elements.
N
(Top) Fixed constraint on a polygon face; (Bottom) Fixed constraint on a polygon face, with
a polygon edge excluded

Lesson
Boundary condition
techniques
Resolving boundary condition conflicts

Conflicts may occur when multiple boundary conditions are applied to the same nodal degree of
freedom (DOF). Each time you create a boundary condition, NX automatically identifies conflicts. An
icon appears in the Simulation Navigator next to the solution that contains conflicting boundary
yS
conditions to indicate the conflict.
To resolve the constraints, right-click the solution and choose Resolve Constraints.
N
Activity
Define constraints using local coordinate systems — In this activity, you will learn techniques for
working with local coordinate systems to define boundary conditions.
yS

N
Lesson
Boundary condition
techniques
Review questions
1. True/False. The absolute coordinate system can be moved and redefined as cylindrical.
2. True/False. By default, the nodal displacement coordinate system is the absolute coordinate
yS
system.
3. What option on the constraint dialog boxes can be used to avoid creating conflicting constraints?
N
Summary
• Display boundary conditions.
yS
• Use a coordinate system to define a boundary condition.
• Resolve constraint conflicts.

N
N
yS
Lesson 22: Fields and expressions
yS
Objectives

• Define time-dependent boundary conditions using fields.
• Define spatially-varying boundary conditions using expressions.

N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
Fields and expressions
and expressions
Fields in Advanced Simulation

In Advanced Simulation, you can use fields to define how a dependent domain varies with respect
to an independent domain.
• Dependent domains consist of either a single dependent variable, or a set of dependent variables.
yS
• Independent domains consist of one or more non-spatial independent variables, spatial
coordinates, or a single non-spatial independent variable and a set of spatial coordinates.
You can create fields from within the context of a specific application, or you can create fields directly
from the Simulation Navigator. If you create a field from the context of a specific application,
the dependent domain is predefined.
Fields are listed under the Fields node in the Simulation Navigator.
N
Using fields in Advanced Simulation

In Advanced Simulation, you can use fields to perform the following tasks:
• Define how a boundary condition varies with respect to a single independent variable like time
or temperature.
yS
• Define how a boundary condition varies spatially.
• Define how a boundary condition varies with respect to a combination of an independent variable
like time or temperature, and a spatial location.
• Define the dependence of material properties on strain, temperature, or strain and temperature.
• Define how the thickness of a sheet body varies spatially.
• Use the results from one analysis in another analysis.

N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
and expressions
Types of fields in Advanced Simulation

Formula fields Formula fields let you use NX expressions to define the relationship between
the independent and dependent domains.
Table fields Table fields let you use tabular data to define the relationship between the
yS
independent and dependent domains.
Reference fields Reference fields let you create fields from results.
Linked fields Linked fields let you apply an existing field with a spatial independent domain
to a different location.
Table of fields Table of fields let you use a collection of fields to approximate a functional
relationship where the independent domain has two or more variables.
N
Spatial maps
A spatial map or spatial field is a field with spatial coordinates as the independent domain. You can
define the coordinate basis of a spatial map to be one of the following:
• The global coordinate system
yS
• A local coordinate system
• A parametric coordinate system
Use spatial maps to do the following:

• Apply a 3D field representation of a boundary condition over a 3D volume.
• Map a 3D field representation of a boundary condition to 1D, 2D, and 3D curves and surfaces.
• Create a 3D field representation of a boundary condition from a 2D field defined in an

axisymmetric plane.
• Define thickness variations for a 2D or 3D surface.

N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
and expressions
Using fields to specify boundary conditions

Specifying magnitude and distribution in a single field
The field can have either a spatial independent domain or an independent domain that is a
yS
combination of spatial variables and one non-spatial variable. The valid non-spatial variables are
time, frequency, and temperature.
Examples of boundary conditions for which you can specify magnitude and direction in one field
include Pressure and Enforced Displacement Constraint. Depending on your selection in the
boundary condition’s Type group, you specify these fields in either the Magnitude or Components
group of the dialog box.
N
Specifying magnitude and distribution in individual fields
You use one field with a non-spatial independent domain of time, frequency, and temperature to
specify the magnitude, and another field with a spatial independent domain to specify the distribution.
Examples of this type of boundary condition include Force and Moment. You specify the field that
represents the magnitude of the boundary condition in the Magnitude group of the dialog box.
You specify the field that represents the distribution of the boundary condition in the Distribution
Field group of the dialog box.

yS
Because you use individual fields to specify magnitude and distribution of these boundary conditions,
NX scales the product of the two fields so that the cumulative magnitude of the distributed boundary
condition at a given time, frequency, or temperature is equal to the value of the magnitude field
at the same time, frequency, or temperature.
N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
and expressions
Expressions in Advanced Simulation

In Advanced Simulation, expressions are mathematical relationships that you can use to specify
boundary conditions, material properties, physical properties, mesh properties, and formula fields,
among others.
yS
Expressions can be dimensional or dimensionless. If an expression is dimensional, units are
associated with the expression.
An expression can represent a constant or a functional relationship. When an expression is a
functional relationship, the value of the expression can change. For example, you can define a
time-varying harmonic force that has an amplitude of 100 N using this expression:
100.0[N]*sin(90.0[degrees]*ug_var(“time”)/1[sec])
If an expression contains spatial variables, the value of the expression varies spatially. If an
expression contains non-spatial variables such as time, temperature, or frequency, and so on, the
value of the expression varies with respect to the non-spatial variables. If an expression contains
both spatial variables and non-spatial variables, the expression varies with respect to the spatial and
non-spatial variables.
N
Domains
NX expressions have an independent domain and a dependent domain.
Independent domain
yS
The independent domain of an expression is the set of variables that are included in the expression.
For example, suppose you enter the following formula for an expression:
2*(ug_var(“x”)/1[mm])*(ug_var(“y”)/1[mm])
In this expression, the variables x and y constitute the independent domain, and the expression
represents a functional relationship of the form f = f(x,y).
The independent domain of an expression can consist of spatial variables only, non-spatial variables
only, or a combination of spatial and non-spatial variables. Unlike fields, there is no limit to the
number of non-spatial variables that you can use in combination with a set of spatial variables.
Dependent domain
The dependent domain of an expression is limited to a single quantity. This is different from fields
where the dependent domain can be, for example, a set of force components.
N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
and expressions
Inputs to expressions
Expression input Description
Punctuation Parentheses, brackets, and quotes
Constants Numerical values and Boolean constants such as true,false
yS
Mathematical operators Algebraic, logical, and conditions operators
Functions Mathematical and lookup functions, user-defined functions
Variables Predefined variables (UG variable function)
Other expressions
Auto-generated Automatically generated expressions for commonly used variables
expressions
Fields Fields (field function)
Measurements System- or user-defined
Units
N
Example of an expression
Suppose you define a force in the Force dialog box, and you specify the magnitude of the force
using the following expression:
100.0*sin(90.0[degrees]*ug_var("time")/1[sec])
yS
Viewing the expression alone suggests that the expression is dimensionless. There is no unit
associated with the numerical value of 100.0, and the sine function evaluates to a dimensionless
value. However, because you created the expression in the Force dialog box, NX automatically
interprets the dimensionality of the expression to be force. You specify the unit of force such as
Newtons or milli-Newtons in the Force dialog box, and NX assigns the unit to the expression.
The expression is plotted in the following graph. The horizontal axis represents time in seconds and
the vertical axis represents force in the specified units. The argument of the sine function is explicitly
defined to be in degrees. You do this by assigning the unit of degrees to the numerical value of 90.0,
and making the time variable dimensionless by dividing it by 1[sec].
N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
and expressions
Using expressions to specify boundary conditions

Specifying magnitude and distribution in a single expression
The expression can have either a spatial independent domain or an independent domain that is a
yS
combination of spatial variables and one non-spatial variable. The valid non-spatial variables are
time, frequency, and temperature.
Examples of boundary conditions for which you can specify magnitude and direction in one
expression include Pressure and Enforced Displacement Constraint. Depending on your selection
in the boundary condition’s Type group, you specify these expressions in either the Magnitude or
Components group of the dialog box.
Specifying magnitude with an expression and distribution with a field
You use an expression with a non-spatial independent domain of time, frequency, and temperature to
specify the magnitude, and a field with a spatial independent domain to specify the distribution.
Examples of this type of boundary condition include Force and Moment. You specify the expression
that represents the magnitude of the boundary condition in the Magnitude group of the dialog box.
You specify the field that represents the distribution of the boundary condition in the Distribution
Field group of the dialog box.
Because you use an expression to specify magnitude and a field to specify distribution of these
boundary conditions, NX scales the product of the expression and field so that the cumulative
magnitude of the distributed boundary condition at a given time, frequency, or temperature is equal to
the value of the expression at the same time, frequency, or temperature.
N
Activities
Fields and expressions activities:
• Apply a time-dependent boundary condition — In this activity, you use a table field to define a
time-dependent enforced displacement constraint.
yS
• Apply a spatially-varying pressure — In this activity, you use a formula field to define a
spatially-varying pressure.

N
Lesson
Lesson 22:22:Fields
and expressions
Review questions
1. True/False. Fields can be used to define how boundary conditions vary with time, temperature, or
frequency.
yS
2. True/False. A spatial field can be used to define how the magnitude of a boundary condition
varies with location.
3. True/False. The independent domain for the expression can include spatial and/or non-spatial
variables.
N
Summary
• Define time-dependent and spatially-varying boundary conditions using fields.
yS
• Define spatially-varying boundary conditions using expressions.
N
N
yS
Part V: Post processing techniques
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 23: Post processing techniques
yS
Objectives

• Generate various types of graphs.
• Combine and manipulate results.
• Use scalar expressions to generate customized results.

N
Lesson
Lesson 23:23:Post Post processing
processing techniques
techniques
Graphs
You can create an XY graph of the results shown in the current post view.
• You can graph a single result across a range of nodes or elements. You can graph this result
across a predefined, reusable path along or through the FE model, or you can select nodes or
yS
elements in the model. You can set the X axis to entity IDs, length along a path, length along a
vector, or coordinate values along a coordinate system axis.
• You can plot results of the same type across a sequence of time steps, load cases, frequencies,
modes, or iterations. You can graph results for a single node as a data series, for multiple nodes
as multiple data series, or for multiple nodes combined into a single data series.
• You can create a two-function plot directly from two selected post views. Use a two-function plot,
for example, to graph strain against displacement.
Once you create a graph, you can use the Functions and Graphing tools to further refine your
graph displays.
N
Post processing techniques
Graphing a single result across nodes or elements

You can graph a single result at a single load case, iteration or time step, across a series of nodes or
elements.
yS
Selecting entities versus defining a path (Defining the Y axis)
The result values at nodes are graphed on the Y axis (ordinate) of an XY plot.
You can graph this result across a named, reusable path along or through the FE model, or you can
directly select nodes or elements in the model.
Displacements along an edge.
Defining the X axis
You can set the graph X axis (abscissa) to entity IDs, length along a path, length along a vector, or
coordinate values along a coordinate system axis.
N
Lesson
techniques
Graphing results across multiple iterations

You can plot results of the same type across a sequence of time steps, load cases, frequencies,
modes, or iterations. You can graph results for a single node as a data series, for multiple nodes as
multiple data series, or for multiple nodes combined into a single data series.
yS
Defining the Y axis
You define the X axis by selecting one or more entities from the model. You can selecting entities by
picking them from the model, by entering entity IDs, or by selecting a defined group. You can also
specify an arbitrary point on an element edge or face. The resulting graph plots the values of the
selected entities across a specified range of iterations or load cases.
Defining the X axis
The X axis of the graph is by the specified range of iterations or load cases. By default, the X axis is
set to evenly spaced iteration IDs. Depending on the solution type and the specified display units, you
may also be able to display the X axis in terms of load factors, frequencies, time, and so on.
Contact pressure plotted against load factor for a nonlinear solution.

N
Graph templates
As a best practice, before you change the formatting of a graph, create a graph template. This allows
you to create and save unique formatting for the graph. If you do not create a graph template, any
changes you make to graph formatting are applied to the default graph template.
yS
N
Lesson
techniques
Editing a graph
You can use the XY Graph tools to edit and interrogate your graph. To edit a graph:
• If you are displaying the graph in a standard viewport, click Results tab→XY Graph
yS
group→Editing to enter edit mode.
• If you are displaying the graph in a separate graph window, expand the Toolbar group and
click Editing to enter edit mode.

N
Scatter plots
In Advanced Simulation, a scatter plot is a modified form of the On Path graph type. A scatter
plot shows the distribution of results across selected nodes or elements, along a specified vector
or coordinate system axis.
yS
A scatter plot of stresses through the thickness of a mesh. The X axis is defined as the theta
axis of a selected cylindrical coordinate system.
Defining the X axis for a scatter plot
To define the X axis for a scatter plot, you specify a vector. Values at nodes or elements are projected
onto this vector and displayed as the Y axis values.
Editing the graph style
The default graph template creates a graph with the Graph Style graph style set to Line. To create a
scatter-plot style graph, use the Functions and Graphing Editing command to enter Editing
mode. Double-click the data series and, in the Curve Options dialog box, from the Graph Style
list, choose No Line.
N
Lesson
techniques
Two function plots

Use the Two Function Plot dialog box to plot one result against another. You can create a two
function plot of results along a path, or for one or more nodes or elements across iterations.
Before you can access the Two Function Plot dialog box, you must:
yS
1. Set up a multiple viewport layout.
2. Create two post views, one for each result to examine.
3. In the Post Processing Navigator, control-click to select both post views.
With both post views selected, click Create Graph .
Side-by-side post views of displacement and nonlinear strain.

N
yS
A two function plot of strain versus displacement for selected elements across a series of
nonlinear steps.
N
Lesson
techniques
Combining and manipulating results

Use Results Manipulation to create new results by performing operations on one or more existing
results sets. Choose from the following methods for manipulating results:
• Envelope compares two or more results of the same type and component, and returns the
yS
minimum or maximum value as a unitless, scalar quantity.
• Combination uses standard NX expression syntax to perform operations on one or more

results of the same type.
• Reduction and Multiple Reduction reduce one or more results components to scalar values at
nodes. These scalar values are represented as post-processing expressions.
Each method collects results across the selected types or components based on element or node
IDs. Therefore, the underlying FE models must be compatible in terms of the number of nodes and
elements, IDs, and element types.
Exporting and saving manipulated results
• You can export manipulated results to an I-deas universal file (*.unv), and store, manage, and
post-process them like any other results file. You can export this UNV file as a full results file,
and NX will automatically import it into the Post-Processing Navigator. Or, you can export it
as a companion result to an existing solution.
• You can also save manipulated results directly to an NX field. You can treat this field like any
other NX field: plot, export, or save this field to an AFU file, or use it to define field-based
boundary conditions in subsequent analyses.
N
Result probes
A result probe uses scalar expressions to generate customized results.
The result probe is associated with a solution. You can define a result probe either before or after
you solve the model.
yS
To use a results probe, the model must be solved. When you are ready to generate results, you select
the results probe and the type of output required, which can be contour plots, XY graphs, fields, or
text. The results probe evaluates the results, and then generates the output.
Result probes are stored in the Simulation file.
Creating a results probe
To create a result probe, you can specify the following:

• A formula, which in this case is a scalar expression that defines the results to be generated. The
formula may include result variables, predefined plug-in functions, other result probes, fields,
or points.
• Results for specific loadcases.
• Results for specific iterations. You can also combine results across iterations.
• Results for specific geometry or FE entities.
Some of these options may not apply to your results data.

The dialog box also displays possible output types based on the probe definition. These may be
contour plots, fields, graphs, or an information listing.
Applications of result probes
Result probes provide a flexible way of specifying results.

You can envelope results by specifying the minimum and maximum over an iteration range, or over
geometry. To generate minimum or maximum results as a unitless, scalar quantity, envelope results
by comparing two or more results of the same type and component.
To perform one or more operations on results of the same type, combine results by using standard NX
N
expression syntax. You can define a formula for any combination of result-based quantities, general
NX expressions, predefined plug-in functions, result variables, other result probes, fields, or a point.
With result probes, you can also do the following:
• Track the clearance between two points, identify the initial positions, and define displacement.
• Track history at discrete locations such as points, edges, and faces.
• Evaluate results-dependent properties such as temperature-dependent materials.
• Use the results as input to result-dependent maps, such as those used by boundary conditions.

Lesson
techniques
Applications of result probes

Result probes provide a flexible way of specifying results.
You can envelope results by specifying the minimum and maximum over an iteration range, or over
geometry. To generate minimum or maximum results as a unitless, scalar quantity, envelope results
yS
by comparing two or more results of the same type and component.
To perform one or more operations on results of the same type, combine results by using standard NX
expression syntax. You can define a formula for any combination of result-based quantities, general
NX expressions, predefined plug-in functions, result variables, other result probes, fields, or a point.
With result probes, you can also do the following:
• Track the clearance between two points, identify the initial positions, and define displacement.
• Track history at discrete locations such as points, edges, and faces.
• Evaluate results-dependent properties such as temperature-dependent materials.
• Use the results as input to result-dependent maps, such as those used by boundary conditions.
N
Result variables
A result variable defines a scalar expression that you can use as input to a result probe.
To define a result variable, you must specify the following:
yS
• A result type such as displacement or temperature.
• A location, which can be nodal, elemental, or element nodal.
• A data component.
You use a result variable to define a formula for a result probe. A result probe is associated with a
solution, and it specifies results, load cases, iterations, or geometry to be used to generate the results.
The result variable is not associated with any solution. It is stored in a Simulation file. You can use a
result variable in multiple solutions and result probes.
N
Lesson
techniques
Activities
Post-processing techniques activities:
• Graph results — This activity shows how to create graphs from analysis results.
yS
• Calculate margin of safety using a result probe — This activity shows how to calculate results
using a result probe.
See Post-processing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Review questions
1. Suppose you want to graph how a result varies across a sequence of nodes. Which type of graph
should you create? Graph from a path, or graph from iterations?
yS
2. True/False. Before you can create a result probe, the model must be solved.
3. Results generated from the Results Manipulation commands can be exported to what type
of file?
N
Lesson
techniques
Summary
• Generate various types of graphs.
yS
• Combine and manipulate results.
• Use scalar expressions to generate customized results.

N
Lesson 24: Reports
yS
Objectives

• Generate a report containing model data.
• Export the report to an HTML file.
• Add images to a report.

N
Lesson
Lesson 24:24:Reports
Reports
Reports
A report is an HTML document containing .gif images and other FE model data. It consists of a title
page and multiple chapters. Each chapter contains automatically generated information, with some
sections including optional information that you can enter or edit.
yS Report structure in the Simulation Navigator

N
Reports
Exporting a report
To write the report to an HTML file and graphics files, use the Export option.
The report is stored in your local temp directory.
yS
When the files are written, the software launches your default browser and displays the resulting
report.
N
Lesson
Reports
Adding images to the report

In the Simulation Navigator, under Report, right-click the Images node and choose Snapshot.
You can snap model images, as well as Post-processing images.
yS
N
Reports
Activity
Generate reports — In this activity, you create an HTML report of model data, solution data, and
images.
yS
N
Lesson
Reports
Review questions
1. What command automatically generates a report?
2. True/False. Images can be included in a report.
yS
N
Reports
Summary
• Generate a report.
yS
• Export the report to an HTML file.
• Add images to the report.

N
N
yS
Part VI: Advanced Simulation solutions
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 25: Modal analysis
yS
Objectives

• Prepare for a modal analysis.
• Run a modal analysis.
• Review modal analysis results.

N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Modal analysis
Modal analysis:
• Calculates natural frequencies and the corresponding mode shapes.
yS
• Does not consider damping.
N
Modal analysis
How stiffness and mass affect natural frequency

For a single DOF system, the natural frequency is related to the mass (M) and stiffness (K) as follows:
yS
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Supported modal analysis types

In Advanced Simulation, you can choose from the following modal analysis types when you create
a structural solution:
Solver Solution type
yS
SOL 103 Real Eigenvalues
SOL 103 Response Simulation
NX Nastran
SOL 103 Superelement
SOL 103 Flexible Body
SOL 103
MSC Nastran
SOL 103 Superelement
ANSYS Modal
ABAQUS Frequency Perturbation substep
N
Modal analysis
Using elements for a modal analysis

Some of the elements that can be used for a modal analysis include:
• 3D tetrahedral or hexahedral solid elements.
yS
• 2D quadrilateral or triangular thin shell elements.
• 1D bar, beam, rod, rigid link, and spring elements.
• 0D concentrated mass elements.
• Gap elements.
For more information about elements, see Physical properties and element attributes in the Advanced
Simulation online Help.
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Using materials for a modal analysis

Material types that can be used in a modal analysis include:
• Isotropic
yS
• Orthotropic
• Anisotropic
• Fluid
For more information about materials, see Materials in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Modal analysis
Defining boundary conditions for a modal analysis

Boundary conditions for modal analysis include constraints and gluing, such as:
• Displacement constraints
yS
• Coupled degrees of freedom.
• Surface-to-surface gluing
For more information, see Boundary Conditions in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Modal pre-stress
A model can be pre-stressed prior to performing a modal analysis.
Pre-stress or stress stiffening is done in a linear static load case.
yS
Pre-stress can include forces, bolt pre-load and contact.
N
Modal analysis
Setting modal solution attributes

For a modal analysis, some of the NX Nastran solution attributes include:
• Output Requests
yS
• Global contact and glue parameters
• Eigenvalue Method. Identifies the type of solve: Lanczos or Householder. The method specifies
the real eigenvalue extraction options for the solution. Eigenvalue extraction options are stored
as a solver-specific object. Lanczos is the recommended method for most models; Householder
is recommended for smaller models.
For more information, see Nastran environment in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Rigid body modes

If you select a Lanczos solve:
• You can solve for the modes of a free-free body.
yS
• If you are calculating modes for an unrestrained structure, it is a good practice to calculate the
rigid body modes. This reveals any unintended mechanisms or grounding resulting from poor
modeling.
• To avoid calculating the rigid body modes, set the frequency range above 1 Hz.
N
Modal analysis
Reviewing modal analysis results

Natural frequencies and mode shapes are the primary results for a modal solution.
• The results are ordered by frequency, with the lowest natural frequency being the first mode, the
next highest being the second mode, and so on.
yS
• The normal modes represent dynamic states in which the elastic and inertial forces are balanced
when no external loads are applied.
• The mode shapes represent relative displacement of the nodes.
• The mode shapes help you determine what load locations and directions will excite the structure.
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Animating mode shapes
In Post-processing, Animation is particularly useful for visualizing mode shapes.

When animating mode shapes, in the Animation dialog box:
yS
• Set Style to Modal.
• Select Full Cycle.

N
Modal analysis
Activity
Modal analysis — In this activity, you perform a modal analysis of a speaker cabinet.
yS
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Project
Modal analysis — This optional project uses the SOL 103 Real Eigenvalues solution sequence
to perform a modal analysis of a tuning fork.
yS
N
Modal analysis
Review questions
1. Cite an example where prestress affects the modal characteristics of a structure. Hint: consider
musical instruments.
yS
2. A completely unrestrained structure has how many rigid body modes?
3. Suppose a structure is unrestrained or only partially constrained. How can the user avoid
calculating the rigid body modes?
N
Lesson
Lesson 25:25:Modal
Modal analysis
analysis
Summary
• Prepare for a modal analysis.
yS
• Solve the model.
• Review modal analysis results.

N
Lesson 26: Thermal analysis
yS
Objectives

• Prepare for a thermal analysis.
• Run a thermal analysis.
• Review thermal analysis results.

N
Lesson
Lesson 26:26:Thermal
Thermal analysis
analysis
Thermal analysis
Thermal analysis:
• Can verify the design of a part that must function over a broad range of temperatures.
yS
• Can simulate conduction, convection, and simple radiation.
• Does not calculate view factors.

N
Thermal analysis
Supported thermal analysis types

In Advanced Simulation, you can choose from the following thermal analysis types when you create a
thermal solution:
yS
NX Nastran SOL 153 Steady State Nonlinear Heat Transfer
MSC Nastran SOL 159 Transient Nonlinear Heat Transfer
Steady State Thermal
ANSYS
Transient Thermal
ABAQUS Heat Transfer
N
Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Using elements for a thermal analysis

Some of the elements that can be used for a thermal analysis include:
yS
• 1D bar, beam, rod, and rigid link elements.
The elements have one degree of freedom per node (temperature).

N
Thermal analysis
Using materials for a thermal analysis

Material types that can be used in a thermal analysis include:
• Isotropic
yS
• Orthotropic
• Anisotropic
N
Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Defining thermal material properties

Thermal properties of materials include:
• Temperature (TREF)— Reference temperature used when calculating the temperature
difference during thermal strain calculations. If the reference temperature is not specified, the
yS
default solution temperature is used.
• Thermal Expansion Coefficient (A) — Thermal expansion coefficient used when calculating
thermal strains from the results of a thermal analysis in a linear static analysis.
• Thermal Conductivity (K) — Thermal conductivity used in conduction heat transfer calculations.
You can define Thermal Expansion Coefficient (A) and Thermal Conductivity (K) as tables to
make them temperature-dependent.
N
Thermal analysis
Defining constraints and loads for a thermal analysis

Thermal Constraints are temperatures applied to geometry or nodes. You can define thermal
constraints to be either fixed or to vary.
Depending on the problem you are modeling, you can define a thermal model using constraints only.
yS
You can define four types of thermal loads:
• Temperature applies a temperature to geometry or nodes.
• Heat Flux applies a heat flux load to simulate heat transferred through a unit area.
• Radiation applies a radiation load which defines radiant exchange between a finite element
face and a black body or an infinite space.
• Heat Generation applies a heat generation load which defines the generation of thermal energy
by an object.
N

Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Additional boundary conditions for thermal analysis

In addition to thermal loads and constraints, you can define the following thermal boundary conditions:
• Convection defines an exchange of thermal energy proportional to the difference between the
surface temperature on the geometry and the temperature of the surroundings. You specify the
yS
ambient temperature and convection coefficient for selected elements or geometry.
• (Nastran only) For selected nodes or geometry, Initial Temperatures overrides the default
initialization temperature defined in the solution.
• (Nastran only) Material Temperatures applies material temperatures to nodes or geometry.
Note that any exterior node that has no boundary conditions assigned to it behaves adiabatically.
N
Thermal analysis
Setting thermal solution attributes

For a thermal analysis, some of the NX Nastran solution attributes include:
• Global Iterative Solver
yS
• Output Requests. Some output requests are on by default.
• Global Glue Parameters
N
Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Thermal analysis results types

Thermal analysis results include:
• Temperature: A nodal scalar.
yS
• Temperature gradient: Shows changes in temperature throughout the model.
• Heat flux: Describes the movement of thermal energy throughout the model.
N
Thermal analysis
Reviewing thermal results

To review thermal results, you can:
• Animate the result to view temperature changes through the model.
yS
• Use Identify or New Annotation to identify the nodes with the highest or lowest temperature.
N
Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Thermal stresses and strains

You can calculate thermal stresses and strains from a linear static analysis.
Thermal strains are induced when nodal temperatures differ from the reference temperature. You can
assign temperatures directly to nodes or by specifying the temperature of geometry.
yS
Mechanical loads can be included in an analysis where thermal strains exist to evaluate the combined
effect of both loadings.
N
Thermal analysis
Thermal stress analysis

A thermal stress analysis can optionally use thermal results as pre-load input for a structural analysis.
One way to apply temperature results from a thermal analysis to a structural analysis, is to use the
Temperature command with Temperature – External Time Unassigned selected as the Type.
yS
When you specify thermal results for a structural analysis, the solver:
• Reads the nodal temperature data from the selected output file.
• Applies the temperatures to the nodes of the structure. The meshes must be identical for NX
Nastran, but are not required for NX Thermal.
• Uses the strain free temperature from the material data or the solution attributes for the Δt
calculation.
• Uses the structural material properties, together with any existing structural loads.
N
Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Activity
Thermal analysis — In this activity, you perform a thermal analysis of an exhaust manifold part.
yS
N
Thermal analysis
Project
Thermal analysis — This optional project uses the SOL 153 Steady State Nonlinear Heat Transfer
solution sequence to perform a steady-state thermal analysis of a heat sink.
yS
N
Lesson
Thermal analysis
analysis
Review questions
1. Can solution type SOl 153 be used to solve problems where the temperature varies with time?
2. Can temperature-dependent material properties be used with solution type SOL 153?
yS
3. True/False. Advanced Simulation can use the results of a thermal analysis in a structural model
to predict thermal stresses.
N
Thermal analysis
Summary
• Prepare a model for a thermal analysis.
yS
• Review thermal analysis results.

N
N
yS
Lesson 27: Buckling analysis
yS
Objectives

• Prepare for a buckling analysis.
• Run a buckling analysis.
• Review buckling analysis results.

N
Lesson
Lesson 27:27:Buckling
Buckling analysis
analysis
Buckling analysis
Buckling analysis:
• Determines buckling loads and buckled mode shapes.
yS
A buckling load is the critical load at which a structure becomes unstable.
A buckled mode shape is the characteristic shape associated with a structure's buckled
response.
• Identifies the critical load factor, which is the value that can be multiplied by the applied load to
cause buckling.
N
Buckling analysis
Linear buckling assumptions

The buckling analysis uses linear theory. The following assumptions and limitations apply:
• The deflections prior to buckling are small.
yS
• The reference equilibrium configuration is the initial geometry of the part.
• The response of the structure prior to buckling exhibits a linear relationship between stress
and strain.
• Post-buckling behavior is not predicted.

N
Lesson
Buckling analysis
analysis
Supported buckling analysis types

In Advanced Simulation, you can choose from the following buckling analysis types when you
create a buckling solution:
yS
NX Nastran
SOL 105 Linear Buckling
MSC Nastran
ANSYS Linear Buckling
ABAQUS Buckling Perturbation substep
N
Buckling analysis
Using elements for a buckling analysis

Some of the elements that can be used for a buckling analysis include:
yS
• 1D bar, beam, rod, rigid link, and spring elements.
• 0D concentrated mass elements.
Gap elements are not valid in a linear buckling analysis.

N
Lesson
Buckling analysis
analysis
Using materials for a buckling analysis

Material types that can be used in a buckling analysis include:
• Isotropic
yS
• Orthotropic
• Anisotropic
N
Buckling analysis
Defining boundary conditions for a buckling analysis

For a buckling analysis:
1. Define constraints. Constrain the model as you would for a linear static analysis.
yS
2. Apply loads. The load set can contain more than one load type (Force, Pressure), but every load
will be scaled by the load factor. A magnitude of 1 is often used when a single load type will
cause the model to buckle.
N
Lesson
Buckling analysis
analysis
Setting buckling solution attributes

In NX Nastran, a buckling solution includes a buckling loads subcase and a buckling methods
subcase.
For a buckling analysis, some of the NX Nastran solution attributes include:
yS
• Output Requests. Some output requests are on by default.
• Global contact and glue parameters.
N
Buckling analysis
Reviewing buckling analysis results

For NX Nastran results, buckling analysis results are listed as:
• A set of static analysis results for the buckling loads subcase.
yS
• A set of modes for the buckling methods subcase.
o Each mode has an eigenvalue (load factor) listed.
o The applied load multiplied by the buckling load factor is the load at which the part will buckle.
o The first mode has the lowest buckling load factor and is usually the mode of most interest.
N
Lesson
Buckling analysis
analysis
Activity
Buckling analysis — In this activity, you analyze a strap to determine the first three buckling modes.
yS
N
Buckling analysis
Project
Buckling analysis — This optional project uses the SOL 105 Linear Buckling solution sequence to
find the critical load for a tapered bar.
yS
N
Lesson
Buckling analysis
analysis
Review questions
1. True/False. Linear buckling theory assumes that prior to buckling, deflections are small, and
the stresses and strains are linearly related.
yS
2. Suppose the model of a structure that buckles under a single load produces the results shown
below. If the magnitude of the load is specified as 2 N, what is the critical load of the structure?
N
Buckling analysis
Summary
• Prepare a model for a buckling analysis.
yS
• Review buckling analysis results.

N
N
yS
Lesson 28: Contact and gluing
yS
Objectives

• Apply surface-to-surface contact and gluing to a model.
• Apply edge-to-surface gluing to a model.

N
Lesson
Lesson 28:28:Contact
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Contact and glue conditions

NX creates a number of different commands that you can use to model:
• Regions in your model where contact occurs between surfaces.
yS
• Problems where separate surfaces, or an edge and a surface, need to be tied or glued together
to prevent any relative motion between them.
The commands available for defining contact and glue conditions depend on your specified solver.
NX Nastran includes the commands listed in the following table.
Surface-to-Surface Gluing
Surface-to-Surface Contact
Edge-to-Surface Gluing
Axisymmetric Edge-to-Edge Contact
Advanced Axisymmetric Nonlinear Contact Edge-to-Edge Gluing
N
Contact and gluing
Finding face pairs for contact and gluing

Many simulation objects, such as contact or glue objects, require you to define pairs of surfaces. You
can use the Create Automatic Face Pairs dialog box to determine all the face pairs in the model, or
in a selected set of faces, whose distance is below a specified tolerance.
yS
Automatic face pairs require an update when:
• Faces in the master model have been modified.
• Bodies in the master model have been transformed.
• Bodies have been added or removed.

N
Lesson
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Defining surface-to-surface contact

Use Surface-to-Surface Contact to define contact conditions between two surfaces. The
surface-to-surface contact conditions allow the solution to search and detect when a pair of element
faces come into contact. The contact conditions prevent the faces from penetrating and allow finite
yS
sliding with optional friction effects. The surface-to-surface contact source and target regions consist
of shell and/or solid element faces. From element faces in the source region, a top and bottom
normal is projected. The software creates a contact element if:
• Any of the source element normals intersect with an element in the target region.
• The distance between the two faces is equal to or less than the defined separation distance.
N
Contact and gluing
Defining parameters for contact conditions

Contact parameters for linear solutions
The two types of contact parameters modeling objects for linear solutions allow you to specify
yS
additional options to control the contact algorithm the software uses in NX Nastran SOL 101, 103,
111, and 112 analyses. These options correspond to the fields on the NX Nastran BCTPARM bulk
data entry.
• Create a Contact Parameters–Linear Global modeling object to define surface-to-surface
contact parameters for all contact definitions in a given solution. You use the Global Contact
Parameters option on the Case Control page of the Solution dialog box to assign a Contact
Parameters–Linear Global modeling object to the solution.
• Create a Contact Parameters–Linear Pair Override modeling object to locally override a subset
of the global contact parameters for a given surface-to-surface contact definition. The parameters
you can adjust locally include Penalty Normal Direction and Initial Penetration/Gap. You use
the Local Contact Pair Parameters option in the Surface-to-Surface Contact dialog box to
assign a Contact Parameters–Linear Pair Override object to a contact definition. This allows
you to selectively change the values of certain parameters on a contact pair-by-contact pair basis.
N
Lesson
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Understanding the contact solution

For an NX Nastran solve, the augmented Lagrangian method is used. This method:
• Includes a penalty stiffness to enforce contact constraints.
yS
• Enforces a zero penetration condition.
The solution is considered converged when there is zero penetration (the Contact Force Tolerance
is satisfied) and the contact elements status change is below the specified criteria (the Percentage of
Active Contact Elements is satisfied).
(Top) Contact applied to a part; (Bottom) Resulting stress after the solve
N
Contact and gluing
Contact solve monitor

During a contact solve, to monitor the progress of your solution, on the Solution Monitor, click
Graphics, then choose NX Nastran Graphs→(solution number). In the new window, click Contact
Analysis Convergence.
yS
The number of contact changes and the current load number are displayed at the top of the Contact
Analysis Convergence page, and the graph plots the percentage of contact changes against the
iteration number. The solution is considered converged when the percentage of contact changes falls
below the specified Contact Changes for Convergence value.
If your solution fails to converge, you can use the Contact Analysis Convergence to determine a more
appropriate value for the Allowable Contact Changes criterion.
N
Lesson
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Defining edge-to-surface gluing

Use Edge-to-Surface Gluing to connect an edge to a surface to prevent relative motion in all
directions. An NX Nastran glue connection is a simple and effective method to join dissimilar meshes.
Note
yS
The nodes on the glued edges and surfaces do not need to be coincident.
The glue connection correctly transfers displacement and loads, which results in an accurate strain
and stress condition at the interface.
When you solve your model, NX Nastran internally generates glue elements between the specified
edge and surface. Glue elements are stiff springs that connect and constrain the edges and surfaces.
NX Nastran always uses a weld-like formulation to create the connection. This corresponds to the
GLUETYPE=2 option on the BGPARM bulk data entry.
N
Contact and gluing
Defining surface-to-surface gluing

Create a Surface-to-Surface Gluing simulation object to connect two surfaces to prevent relative
motion in all directions.
To glue two surfaces, you must first define the regions where you want to create glue elements (stiff
yS
springs that connect and constrain the surfaces). A region is a collection of element free faces in a
section of the model where you expect gluing (or contact) to occur. These regions can be created
using shell elements and using free faces of solid elements. Select a source region and target region
in the Simulation model. In the Surface-to-Surface Gluing dialog box, enter the parameters to
define the contact between these two surfaces.
When you solve or export your model, the options in the Surface-to-Surface Gluing dialog box
define an BGSET bulk data entry in your NX Nastran input file.
Using a Glue Parameters modeling object to control the glue algorithm
If you include a Surface-to-Surface Gluing simulation object in your solution, you can use the
options in the Glue Parameters dialog box to adjust NX Nastran's glue algorithm.
N
Lesson
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Defining parameters for glue conditions (NX Nastran)

• Create a Glue Parameters–Linear Global modeling object to control the behavior of the glue
algorithm for all Surface-to-Surface Gluing or Edge-to-Surface Gluing definitions in a given
solution. You use the Global Glue Parameters option on the Case Control page of the Solution
yS
dialog box to assign a Contact Parameters–Linear Global modeling object to your solution.
• Create a Glue Parameters–Linear Pair Override modeling object to locally override a subset
of the global glue parameters for a given glue definition. You use the Create Modeling Object
(Override Parameters) option in the Surface-to-Surface Gluing or Edge-to-Surface Gluing
dialog box to assign the override modeling object to a glue definition. This allows you to selective
change the values of certain parameters in selected pairs of glued surfaces, or pairs of edges
and surfaces.
N
Contact and gluing
Activities
Contact and gluing activities:
• Define contact conditions for a model — In this activity, you use Surface-to-Surface Contact to
simulate a 0.1 mm press fit between a wheel and shaft.
yS
• Define glue conditions for a model — In this activity, you use Surface-to-Surface Gluing to
connect multiple 2D and 3D meshes in a model of a golf club.
• Glue edges to surfaces — In this activity, you use Edge-to-Surface Gluing to connect edges
to polygon surfaces.
See Boundary Conditions→Solver-Specific Simulation Objects in the Advanced Simulation online

Help.
N
Lesson
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Project
Contact analysis — This optional project uses surface-to-surface contact and the SOL 101 Linear
Statics – Global Constraints solution sequence to determine contact pressure between shrink-fit
cylinders.
yS
N
Contact and gluing
Review questions
1. True/False. Large stress discontinuities should be expected across glue connections.
2. True/False. Convergence of a contact solution can be monitored using the Contact Solve Monitor.
yS
N
Lesson
Contact and gluing
and gluing
Summary
• Apply surface-to-surface contact to a model.
yS
• Apply edge-to-surface gluing to a model.
N
Lesson 29: Symmetry
yS
Objectives

• Use various techniques for modeling symmetry.
N
Lesson
Lesson 29:29:Symmetry
Symmetry
Symmetry
Models that exhibit symmetry can be reduced, or “sliced,” into repeating pieces. Analyzing one piece
of the model with appropriate boundary conditions applied provides results that are representative of
the entire model.
yS
A model is symmetric when the model geometry is symmetric and:
• The loads in the model exhibit the same symmetry.
• The constraints in the model exhibit the same symmetry.
• The materials used in the model exhibit the same symmetry.

N
Taking advantage of symmetry reduces the size of the model. Because the model is smaller:
• The solution time is reduced, or,
• A more refined mesh can be used to improve accuracy without increasing the solution time.

Symmetry
Symmetry types
Reflective symmetry occurs when geometry is reflected about one or more planes.
Cyclic symmetry occurs when geometry is repeated about an axis of rotation.
yS
• If there are no out-of-plane displacements on the cut planes, analyze the structure by applying
symmetric constraints to the cut planes.
• If there are out-of-plane displacements on the cut planes, analyze the structure by coupling the
displacements of cyclic symmetric nodes lying in the cut planes.
Axisymmetry occurs when the geometry is a solid of revolution.

N
Lesson
Symmetry
Symmetric constraints
Symmetric constraints prevent out-of-plane displacements and in-plane rotations on planes of
symmetry. To determine the DOFs to constrain:
1. Define the planes of symmetry.
yS
2. Fix translations normal to each plane of symmetry.
3. If your model contains 1D or 2D elements, also fix the rotations that lie within each plane of
symmetry.
N
Symmetry
Modeling symmetry using coupled DOFs

In cyclic symmetric models, out-of-plane deformation typically occurs on cyclic symmetric cut planes.
However, the nodes at equivalent positions on the cyclic symmetric cut planes will always have
identical displacements and rotations, when the displacements and rotations are expressed in terms
yS
of a cylindrical coordinate system that is aligned with the axis of the cyclic symmetric structure. To
enforce the equivalence of displacement and rotation for nodes at equivalent positions on the cyclic
symmetric cut planes, couple the degree of freedom of each pair of equivalently positioned nodes.
To couple the DOF of equivalently positioned nodes, use the Automatic Coupling command.
To create a mesh with equivalently positioned nodes on the cyclic symmetric cut planes, use the 2D
Dependent Mesh command.
N
Lesson
Symmetry
Defining coupled degrees of freedom

With Automatic Coupling:
• The software pairs the nodes on the independent side of the model with nodes on the dependent
side of the model.
yS
• The software searches for nodes based on the translation from a designated independent node
to a designated dependent node using the search tolerance.
• Optionally, the software modifies the displacement coordinate system of all the nodes that
participate in the coupling to use the designated coordinate system.
• You specify the directions and rotations in which the software couples the nodes.
For a given node pair, the degrees of freedom of the first node becomes the independent and the
second becomes the dependent.
N
Symmetry
Axisymmetric analysis
In Advanced Simulation, you can build and analyze structural models that contain axisymmetric
elements only or have a mix of axisymmetric and non-axisymmetric elements. You can build and
analyze thermal models that contain axisymmetric elements only. For all axisymmetric models, you
yS
must set the analysis type and select a 2D solid option.
For axisymmetric analysis, NX supports the following NX Nastran environments:
• If the structural model contains axisymmetric, plane stress, and plane strain elements only, set
Analysis Type to Axisymmetric Structural or Structural, and set 2D Solid Option to XY
Plane, X Axis or ZX Plane, Z Axis. The 2D Solid Option that you select specifies the plane on
which to construct the model and the axis of revolution for the model.
• If the structural model contains axisymmetric, plane stress, plane strain, and other
non-axisymmetric elements, set Analysis Type to Structural, and set 2D Solid Option to XY
Plane, X Axis or ZX Plane, Z Axis. The 2D Solid Option that you select specifies the plane on
which to construct the model and the axis of revolution for the model.
• For axisymmetric thermal models, set Analysis Type to Axisymmetric Thermal. For
axisymmetric thermal models, there are no 2D Solid Option options available, the mesh can
contain axisymmetric elements only, and the model must lie in the ZX-plane with the Z-axis as
the axis of revolution.
N
Lesson
Symmetry
Axisymmetric modeling in the structural environment

Axisymmetric elements are 2D elements that are formulated such that their mechanical behavior
is equivalent to that of a torus with the same cross section. When your problem is completely
axisymmetric, use axisymmetric elements in the mesh exclusively.
yS
The following figure shows an axisymmetric model for an axisymmetric structure. The left hand side
shows the 2D model for the axisymmetric structure. The 2D mesh is comprised of axisymmetric
elements only. The right hand side shows post-processed results for the model that are depicted
over a 180-degree segment of the structure.
Completely axisymmetric problems are uncommon. However, problems that are nearly axisymmetric
are very common. When your problem is nearly axisymmetric, you have the following options:
• Ignore the discrepancies from complete axisymmetry and model the problem with axisymmetric
elements only.
• Account for the discrepancies from complete axisymmetry by modeling the problem with a
combination of axisymmetric and non-axisymmetric elements.
The option that is appropriate depends on the intent of the analysis.

For example, the following figure shows a nearly axisymmetric structure.
N
The illustration shows a section view of a housing whose geometry is axisymmetric except for a series
of regularly spaced holes in the part.

Symmetry
If your goal for modeling the housing is to understand the gross behavior of the housing, ignoring the
holes may be appropriate. If your goal for modeling the housing is to understand the gross behavior
of the housing and account for compliance associated with the holes, creating an axisymmetric model
with a mesh of axisymmetric and non-axisymmetric elements may be appropriate. You can:
• Mesh areas of the cross-section where the solid geometry is not violated with axisymmetric
yS
elements. In the graphic, these elements are colored green.
• Mesh areas of the cross-section where the solid geometry is violated with plane stress or plane
strain elements whose properties are specified to approximate the mechanical behavior of the
structure in these regions. In the graphic, these elements are colored brown.
If your goal is to obtain a detailed understanding of the stress state surrounding the holes, an
axisymmetric model is not appropriate. Creating a cyclic symmetric model of the housing would
provide more meaningful results.
N
Lesson
Symmetry
Aligning the axisymmetric model

Axisymmetric analysis requires you to properly align the center of rotation and the radial axis of the
axisymmetric model to the absolute coordinate system. For example, in the NX Nastran environment,
you can choose one of these ways to align the model:
yS
• The center of rotation is the absolute Z-axis, and the axisymmetric plane is absolute XZ. The
model must lie in the +X half of the XZ plane.
• The center of rotation is the absolute X-axis, and the axisymmetric plane is absolute XY. The
model must lie in the +X half of the XY plane.
Tip
To move the model to the appropriate location for axisymmetric analysis, use the Reposition
Master option. To find this option, right-click the idealized part node in the Simulation
Navigator.
The following example shows a part in the NX Nastran environment. The center of rotation aligns with
the absolute Z-axis. The mesh is created on a section on the XZ plane.
N
Symmetry
Activities
Symmetry activities:
• Model a cyclic symmetric structure — In this activity, you use an automatic coupling constraint
to define a cyclic symmetry model.
yS
• Model an axisymmetric structure — In this activity, you perform an axisymmetric analysis of a
cylindrical part.
N
Lesson
Symmetry
Project
Cyclic symmetry — This optional project uses a cyclic symmetric model and the SOL 101 Linear
Statics – Global Constraints solution sequence to examine twisting of a rod.
yS
N
Symmetry
Review questions
1. True/False. In order for a reflective plane of symmetry to exist, the geometry, constraints, loading,
and material properties all must be symmetric about the plane.
yS
2. What constraints should be applied to the nodes of solid elements lying on a reflective plane of
symmetry?
3. What constraints should be applied to the nodes of shell elements lying on a reflective plane of
symmetry?
4. True/False. In an axisymmetric model, displacements occur only in the radial and axial directions.
5. True/False. In a cyclic-symmetric model, displacements occur only in the radial and axial
directions.
N
Lesson
Symmetry
Summary
• Model axisymmetry.
yS
• Model cyclic symmetry.
N
Lesson 30: Assembly FEM
yS
Objectives

• Create assembly FEMs.
• Connect assembly FEMs.

N
Lesson
Lesson 30:30:Assembly
Assembly
FEM FEM
Assembly FEM
An assembly FEM (.afm) file supports enhanced workflows for analyzing large assemblies. Assembly
FEMs are similar to part assemblies. An assembly FEM contains:
• Occurrence and position data for component FEMs.
yS
• The connection elements that join component FEMs into a system.
• Material and physical property overrides on component FEM meshes.
Assembly FEMs support multiple FEM occurrences – you can map the same FEM to multiple
occurrences of a part in the assembly hierarchy. You can map an assembly FEM to a subassembly
within a larger assembly FEM.
Edits to component FEMs are immediately reflected in the assembly FEM, and in all occurrences of
the component FEM.
N
Assembly FEM
Assembly FEM vs. multi-body FEM

While you can create a single FEM file from an NX assembly, with Assembly FEMs, you can:
• Improve the documentation and management of component meshes using assembly FEMs.
yS
• Use and reuse existing component FEMs.
• Control the loading of component FEMs for more efficient use of resources.
• Replace individual component FEMs with alternate mesh or geometry representations.
• Distribute work among members of a team.
(Left) A standard multi-body FEM; (Right) The same model as an assembly FEM
When you create a FEM from a CAD assembly, each part in the assembly is represented as a
polygon body in the FEM. While this approach is often suitable for small assemblies, it can become
unwieldy when working with large, complex assemblies. Assembly FEMs allow you to track named
meshes on a component-by-component basis, improving documentation and data management.
By mapping individual component FEMs to an assembly FEM, you can reuse existing mesh data,
including legacy and imported FEMs, and you can use the same component FEM (such as a
standardized part) in many assembly FEMs.
N
Being able to replace a component FEM with an alternate mesh or geometry representation allows
you to do what-if analyses without having to recreate the entire model.
Finally, assembly FEMs support teamwork and collaboration. Team members or third parties provide
meshes for individual parts or subassemblies, which an analyst or project leader can assemble into a
full system model. Updates to component FEMs or their associated CAD data can be handled
automatically by the software, or user-controlled on a part-by-part basis.

Lesson
Assembly
FEM FEM
Assembly FEM workflows

Assembly FEMs support two basic workflows:
• Associative. In this workflow, you associate an assembly FEM with an existing assembly of parts,
and map new or existing component FEMs to each component part.
yS
• Non-associative. In this workflow, you first create an empty assembly FEM. You then add
component FEMs to the assembly FEM. Finally, you define the position and orientation of
component FEMs.
Associative workflow Non-associative workflow

1. Create or obtain component FEMs. 1. Create or obtain component FEMs.
2. Create an assembly FEM. 2. Create an empty assembly FEM.
3. Map CAD components to FEMs. 3. Add component FEMs.
4. Define component position and orientation.
4. Connect component FEMs. 5. Connect component FEMs.
5. Resolve label conflicts. 6. Resolve label conflicts.
6. Create a Simulation file. 7. Create a Simulation file.
You can combine associative and non-associative component FEMs within the same assembly FEM.
For example, you could add a non-associative component FEM to an associative assembly FEM to
represent an impact structure for a drop test.
N
Assembly FEM
Creating assembly FEMs

To create an associative assembly FEM, right-click the assembly part node in the Simulation
Navigator, and choose New Assembly FEM.
To create a non-associative assembly FEM:
yS
1. Choose File→New.
2. Click the Simulation tab and select an Assembly Fem template.
3. Clear the Map to part check box.
If you create an associative assembly FEM, the loaded assembly part is shown as a child of the
assembly FEM node, and the component parts are shown as children of the assembly part node.
Assembly FEM
Loaded CAD assembly
CAD component part (Ignored)
Because the CAD components are not currently mapped to component FEMs, their status is set
to Ignored, which means they will not be considered in the analysis. Because there are no FEM
components in the new assembly FEM, the graphics window is empty.
N
Lesson
Assembly
FEM FEM
Associative assembly FEMs

Create an associative assembly FEM when:
• There is a CAD assembly of the system you will be modeling.
yS
• There are geometry-based FEMs of the CAD component parts.
To map existing FEMs to CAD components, in the Simulation Navigator, right-click an ignored
CAD component part and choose Map existing.
If there are multiple instances of the same CAD component part, right-click an ignored CAD
component part and choose Find all matching components. Then right-click the selection and
N
choose Map existing to map the component FEM to all matching CAD components.

Assembly FEM
Non-associative assembly FEMs

Create a non-associative assembly FEM when:
• There is no corresponding CAD assembly.
yS
• You need to assemble imported, non-geometry-based, or manual meshes.
To add component FEMs to a non-associative assembly FEM, right-click the assembly FEM in the
Simulation Navigator and choose Add existing.
If necessary, reposition the component FEMs.
If you are modeling a problem that involves a large number of non-geometry-based or manual
meshes, an assembly FEM can provide better tracking, management, documentation, and reuse
than a single multi-mesh FEM file.
N
Lesson
Assembly
FEM FEM
Subassembly FEMs
A subassembly FEM is an assembly FEM that serves as a component FEM in another assembly FEM.
When you first create an associative assembly FEM, subassemblies in the CAD assembly have the
status Ignored. You can map the CAD subassembly to an assembly FEM to define a subassembly
yS
FEM.
A CAD subassembly can have three different states with regard to associative FEM mapping:
• Ignored — You can map a new or existing component or subassembly FEM to this subassembly.
• Not Mapped — You can map component FEMs to the CAD components in this subassembly.
N
• Mapped — A component or subassembly FEM is currently mapped to this CAD subassembly.
When you first create an associative assembly FEM, subassemblies in the CAD assembly have
the status Ignored. When a CAD subassembly has the status Ignored, you can map the CAD
subassembly to an assembly FEM to define a subassembly FEM. (Alternatively, you can map a
single, multi-body FEM to the CAD subassembly.)
When the CAD subassembly has a status of Ignored, the individual CAD components in the
subassembly have no defined status, and you cannot map a component FEM directly to a
subassembly CAD component.

Assembly FEM
To map component FEMs directly to a subassembly CAD component, in the Simulation Navigator,
right-click the CAD subassembly and choose Unmap. The status of the CAD subassembly changes
to Not Mapped, and the status of the subassembly components is Ignored.
yS
N
Lesson
Assembly
FEM FEM
Connecting component FEMs

In the assembly FEM file, you can define connection elements to join component FEMs into a system
using the following tools:
• Use 1D Connection to define 1D connection meshes, spider elements, or connecting structures
yS
such as pins, bolts, or struts.
• Use Bolt Connection to model a variety of solver-specific bolted connections between

component FEMs.
• Use CFAST/CWELD Connection to create NX Nastran CFAST and CWELD type connections
between component FEMs.
• Use manual node and element operations to create individual elements, including lumped mass,
shells, or solid elements.
• Use Duplicate Nodes to merge duplicate nodes where component FEMs share coincident
edges or faces.
In the Simulation file for the assembly FEM, you can use Surface-to-Surface Contact and
Surface-to-Surface Gluing to constrain behavior at adjacent faces of component FEMs.
N
Assembly FEM
Resolving label conflicts

Following any change to the assembly FEM structure or its component FEMs, check for conflicting
node, element, or coordinate system labels. Apply offsets to resolve any conflicts.
In the Simulation Navigator, right-click the assembly FEM node and choose Assembly Label
yS
Manager.
Be sure to resolve labels for each subassembly FEM prior to resolving labels for the parent assembly
FEM.
• Run Verification produces a text report in the Information window. For each component
FEM, it lists the node, element, and coordinate system label ranges with the offsets applied, and
the current status of each component, subassembly FEM, and subassembly FEM component.
• Automatically Resolve automatically resolves node, element, and coordinate system

labels, using the specified offset type and value.
When using the Assembly Label Manager to resolve label conflicts in assembly FEMs that
include subassembly FEMs, note that offsets are applied to the entire subassembly FEM, not
to the component FEMs within the subassembly FEM. You must resolve label conflicts for each
subassembly FEM individually before resolving label conflicts for the top-level assembly FEM.
Remember to use the Assembly Label Manager to resolve subassembly FEM label conflicts every
time you edit a subassembly FEM.
N
Lesson
Assembly
FEM FEM
Activities
Assembly FEM activities:
• Use Assembly FEMs to analyze large assemblies — In this activity, you create an associative
subassembly FEM and use 1D connections to connect it to a larger assembly FEM.
yS
• Use imported mesh data to create an assembly FEM — In this activity, you import data from NX
Nastran bulk data files, then create and analyze an assembly FEM that is not associated to
geometry.
See Assembly FEMs in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Assembly FEM
Project
Assembly FEM — This optional project creates an associative assembly FEM and uses the SOL
101 Linear Statics – Global Constraints solution sequence to perform a structural analysis on the
assembly.
yS
N
Lesson
Assembly
FEM FEM
Review questions
1. What advantage does an assembly FEM have over a multi-body FEM if the assembly being
modeled contains many instances of the same part?
yS
2. True/False. An associative assembly FEM requires a CAD assembly.
3. What is the primary advantage of an associative assembly FEM over a non-associative assembly
FEM?
4. What is a subassembly FEM?
5. In what file(s) are component connections defined?
6. Suppose Surface-to-Surface Gluing is used to connect the components of a subassembly FEM.

Will the glued connections be present after the subassembly FEM is mapped to the assembly
FEM?
7. True/False. Because component FEMs have similarly labeled nodes, elements, etc., it is
necessary to resolve label conflicts in the assembly FEM.
8. Should labeling conflicts in a subassembly FEM be resolved prior to mapping into an assembly
FEM?
N
Assembly FEM
Summary
• Create assembly FEMs.
yS
• Connect assembly FEMs.
N
N
yS
Lesson 31: Nonlinear static analysis
yS
Objectives

• Understand the differences between linear and nonlinear static solutions.
• Understand what material plasticity is and how to enter stress/strain properties.
• Understand what geometric nonlinear analysis is and when it is needed.
• Understand how to prepare a model for a basic nonlinear static analysis (SOL 106).
N
Lesson
Lesson 31:31:Nonlinear
Nonlinear
staticstatic analysis
analysis
Nonlinear static analysis

The nonlinear solution type SOL 106 is capable of simulating the following conditions: geometric
nonlinear, material plasticity, and hyperelasticity.
This introduction presents two of these nonlinear conditions:
yS
• Material plasticity – Material data is entered that describes both the linear elastic and the plastic
portions of the stress-strain curve.
• Geometric nonlinear – Pressure loads and element stiffness are updated as the structure
deforms. Large displacements and rotation are supported.
SOL 106 solutions can include material plasticity and geometric nonlinearity separately or
simultaneously.
N
Supported nonlinear solution types

In Advanced Simulation, you can choose from the following nonlinear solution types when the
Analysis Type is set to Structural.
yS
SOL 106 Nonlinear Statics – Global Constraints
SOL 106 Nonlinear Statics – Subcase Constraints
NX Nastran SOL 601, 106 Advanced Nonlinear Statics
SOL 601, 129 Advanced Nonlinear Transient
SOL 701 Explicit Advanced Nonlinear Analysis
SOL 106 Nonlinear Statics – Global Constraints
MSC Nastran
SOL 106 Nonlinear Statics – Subcase Constraints
ANSYS Nonlinear Statics
ABAQUS General Analysis
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Considering material plasticity conditions

A SOL 101 linear static solution:
• Assumes that stresses are linearly proportional to the strain.
yS
• Uses the Young's Modulus value entered in the material definition to determine the elastic
stress/strain condition.
A SOL 106 solution with material plasticity conditions:

• Uses the stress/strain data entered in the material definition to determine the combined elastic
and plastic stress/strain condition.
• Calculates the plastic (permanent) strain after the removal of loads.
If the stresses from a SOL 101 solution go beyond the material yield strength, you should consider
using a SOL 106 solution with material plasticity conditions.
N
Comparing linear and nonlinear static solutions

A SOL 101 linear static solution:
• Calculates the element stiffness (K) matrix once at the beginning of the solution.
yS
• Assumes Hooke's law, Force = K U, to calculate displacements (U).
• Does not account for large displacements and rotation.
• Does not update pressure load directions.
A SOL 106 solution with geometric nonlinear conditions:

• Iterates, and can follow a nonlinear force/displacement path.
• Periodically updates the element stiffness matrix while following the force/displacement path.
• Can use a strain definition that accounts for large displacements and rotations.
• Can use the current configuration of a deformed structure to determine the direction of pressure
loads.
A stiffness change may be a result of both geometry and material nonlinear effects if both are
included in the analysis.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Geometric nonlinear problem

Consider this geometric nonlinear problem:
Membrane behavior becomes more significant as deflections increase.
yS
SOL 106 solutions with geometric nonlinear conditions will capture this behavior.
N
Using elements for solution type SOL 106

For solution type SOL 106, nonlinear elements may be combined with linear elements for
computational efficiency if the nonlinear effects can be localized. These elements include:
• 3D 4-noded and 10-noded tetrahedral solid elements.
yS
• 3D 8-noded and 20-noded hexahedral solid elements.
• 3D 6-noded and 15-noded pentagonal solid elements.
• 2D 4-noded or 8-noded quadrilateral, or 3-noded or 6-noded triangular thin shell elements.
• 1D 2-noded bar, beam, rod, and spring elements.
• GAP elements are created when “contact mesh” or “surface contact mesh” mesh mating
conditions are defined. SOL 106 solution treats the GAP element as a nonlinear gap element in
which the gap conditions update as the nonlinear solution iterates.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Using materials for SOL 106

Material types that can be used in the solution type SOL 106 include:
• Isotropic with or without plastic properties.
yS
• Anisotropic for geometric nonlinear only.
• Hyperelastic properties that can be assigned directly to the physical properties for PLPLANE
(2D elements) or PLSOLID (3D elements).
N
Entering stress/strain data for SOL 106

1. Create a new isotropic material.
2. In the Stress-Strain Related Properties group, from the Stress-Strain (H) list, select New
yS
Field→Table.
3. From the Independent domain list, choose Strain.
4. Enter a value of 0,0 for the first data point. For the second point, enter a value that corresponds
to the yield point.
You can also define additional data points.
5. In the Isotropic Material dialog box, enter an Initial Yield Point (LIMIT 1) value. This value
must match the second stress value in the stress-strain table.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Defining boundary conditions for SOL 106

Boundary conditions for solution types SOL 106 can be geometry-based or finite element-based.
Examples include:
• Displacement constraints.
yS
• All loads. Only pressure loads are updated in geometric nonlinear.
• Surface-to-surface gluing.
For more information, see Boundary conditions in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Setting solution attributes for solution type SOL 106

For the solution type SOL 106 , some of the key solution attributes are:
• Large Displacements – Accounts for geometric nonlinearities.
yS
• Intermediate Output (Nonlinear Parameters option) – Determines if output is stored for every
converged load increment, or only at the final increment for each subcase.
• Number of Increments (Nonlinear Parameters option) – Subdivides all subcase loads by the
value entered. This can be increased if a solution has problems converging.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Nonlinear static analysis is an iterative solution

Because the load-deflection curve is nonlinear, the software must solve the equations on an iterative
basis. The convergence criteria determines when the answer is acceptable for each load step.
• Before the load increments, the current load condition must pass the convergence criteria.
yS
o You can set convergence criteria for SOL 106 solutions in the Solution dialog box in
the Convergence Criteria group (Solution dialog box→ Case Control→ Nonlinear
Parameters→ Convergence Criteria).
• If a load step fails to converge, splitting the increment into smaller steps can help the solution
proceed.
N
Incrementing loads using multiple subcases in SOL 106

For the solution type SOL 106, loads are manually incremented in two ways. You can:
• Create multiple subcases.
yS
• Use the Number of Increments solution attribute to divide each subcase by the same amount.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Example of incrementing loads in SOL 106

The example demonstrates ramping a load up to 1000 pounds by 250 pound increments, then
ramping the load off using the same increments.
• Eight solution subcases must be created for each load step.
yS
• The final subcase has no load set included, only a constraint condition.
• If the Number of Increments solution attribute is set to 10, the loading is subdivided further into
25 pound increments per subcase.
N
Viewing plastic strain results for SOL 106

If the loads and material definitions are such that plastic strain results exist:
• SOL 106 – Plastic strain is output in the NX Nastran ASCII output file *.f06 if stress output is
requested.
yS
Plastic strain results are listed under the Nonlinear Stresses heading.
The NX Nastran input file and all associated output files are stored in the directory path where your
FEM and Simulation files are stored.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Nonlinear analysis resources

This is a very general introduction to Nonlinear static analysis. Nonlinear analysis is a large topic that
you must investigate further if you plan to use the nonlinear solution types. Resources for all of the
NX Nastran nonlinear solution types are available in the NX Nastran documentation:
yS
• Nonlinear Analysis User’s Guide
• Handbook of Nonlinear Analysis (SOL 106)
• Advanced Nonlinear Theory and Modeling Guide
• NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide
• Siemens PLM Software's instructorled training – NX Nastran Advanced Nonlinear

N
Activities
Nonlinear static analysis activities:
• Geometric nonlinear analysis — In this activity, you perform a nonlinear static analysis to
demonstrate the effects of geometric nonlinear conditions
yS
• Material nonlinear analysis using SOL 106 — In this activity, you perform a nonlinear static
analysis to demonstrate the effects of material nonlinear conditions.
• Display nonlinear analysis results — In this activity, you graph strain and displacement for a
transient solution, and use the Functions and Graphing tools to combine graph data.
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Projects
• Geometric nonlinear analysis — This optional project uses a geometric nonlinear model and the
SOL 601,106 Advanced Nonlinear Statics solution sequence to determine the force required to
disassemble a ball-and-socket joint.
yS
• Material nonlinear analysis — This optional project uses the SOL 601,106 Advanced Nonlinear
Statics solution sequence to examine plastic action in a cylindrical pressure vessel.
• Hardening models — This optional project examines the three hardening rules supported in the
SOL 601,106 Advanced Nonlinear Statics solution sequence.
N
Review questions
1. True/False. Advanced Simulation is capable of modeling large displacements and plasticity
simultaneously.
yS
2. True/False. In a nonlinear solution, the element stiffness matrices are updated periodically to
reflect changes in geometry and material behavior.
3. True/False. For cases where material behavior is linear elastic, a linear static solution should
always be used.
4. When entering a stress/strain data table, the first data point is always 0,0. What is always the
second data point?
5. Can the user specify the convergence criteria for a nonlinear solution?
N
Lesson
Nonlinear
analysis
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Learned about the differences between linear and nonlinear static solutions.
yS
• Learned what material plasticity is, and how to enter stress/strain properties.
• Learned what geometric nonlinear is and when it is needed.
• Prepared a model for a basic nonlinear static analysis (SOL 106).

N
Lesson 32: Geometry optimization
yS
Objectives

• Create a geometry optimization setup.
• Solve the geometry optimization setup.
• Review geometry optimization results.

N
Lesson
Geometry optimization
optimization
Geometry optimization is a process that helps you arrive at the best solution for a given design goal.
To achieve the design goal, you set convergence parameters for:
yS
• The design objective
• Design constraints
• Design variables
The software then performs a series of analysis iterations to converge on an optimum design.
After you perform an optimized solve, you can review the results in Post-processing.
N
Geometry optimization workflow

1. Perform an analysis to establish the baseline values for stresses, displacements, frequency,
and so on.
yS
2. Create an optimization setup based on the current solution. It includes the objective, constraints,
and design variables.
3. Solve the optimization setup.

• As the iterations are calculated, the results are displayed in a graph. When the calculations
are complete, a spreadsheet displays the calculated values.
• The optimizer changes the expressions in the idealized part file to the dimensions used
in the final iteration.
4. In Post-processing, review the results for each iteration and compare them to the original part.
N
Lesson
optimization
Creating a geometry optimization

1. In the Simulation Navigator, right-click the Simulation node and choose New Solution
Process→Geometry Optimization.
yS
2. From the Solution list, select a solved solution to which to add the solution process.
3. From the Optimization Type list, select NX Optimizer.
4. Click OK to open the Geometry Optimization dialog box.
5. Follow the steps on the dialog box to set up the optimization objective, constraints, design
variables, and control parameters.
N
Defining the objective

The objective is measured during each iteration against the type of goal you want to reach. You can:
• Minimize the objective
yS
• Maximize the objective
• Drive the objective toward a target value
The types of objectives available depend on the solution type your geometry optimization is based
on. For example, you can minimize stress or displacement, or maximize a natural frequency.
Displacement, stress, and reaction force objectives require the use of the Result Measure command
to extract the results from the solution.
N
Lesson
optimization
Defining design constraints

Design constraints define your upper and lower limits on a specific attribute. The constraint puts limits
on what the optimization can change in its attempt to meet the design objective.
Geometry optimization uses the results from an analysis, typically displacement or stress, as input to
yS
evaluating the constraints.
During each iteration, the software compares the value of each constraint attribute against its limit.
If a constraint value falls outside its limit, the model is considered to be in an invalid state. The
optimization returns to the previous valid state and tries different values for the design variables.
You can constrain weight, volume, and frequency. In addition, you can use the Result Measure
command to extract the results of the solution, such as displacement, stress, and reaction force, for
use as a constraint.
N
Defining design variables

Design variables define those aspects of your design that you allow the optimization to modify for the
redesign.
Depending on your model and solution type, you can define the following values as design variables:
yS
• Beam section properties
• Shell element properties
• Feature dimensions
• Sketch dimensions
• NX expressions
Updates to CAE polygon geometry when design variables are based on CAD features
If you define a design variable for a CAD feature dimension, be aware that when you make changes
to the CAE model’s polygon geometry, such as splitting, stitching, or merging bodies, faces, or
edges, the CAE polygon geometry and the CAD model may become out of sync. As a result, design
variables that are based on CAD features may no longer be associative to the CAE model. If this is
the case, when the optimization updates these design variables, the changes may not be propagated
to the polygon geometry, and the mesh may not be updated.
Using NX expressions as design variables
When you create a design variable using an NX expression that was created outside of the Simulation
file, the software creates an interpart expression that the design variable references. The interpart
expression automatically locks the original expression. After you solve the optimization, if you decide
to reset the model by solving again, you must first delete the design variable to unlock the expression,
and then recreate the design variable.
N
Lesson
optimization
Part files modified by Geometry Optimization

Depending on the design variables you define, the software applies the optimization changes to
the following NX part files.
If the design variable is: The optimization modifies this part file:
yS
Section or shell property FEM file and Simulation file
Expression (interpart expression) Idealized part file and master part file
Sketch dimension (interpart expression) Idealized part file and master part part file
Feature dimension (interpart expression) Idealized part file and master part part file
N
Solver iterations
During each iteration of the solver, the software:
• Updates design variable values.
yS
• Calculates constraint and objective values.
• Sends constraint and objective values to the optimizer.
As the iterations are calculated, the results are displayed in a graph.

When the calculations are complete, a spreadsheet displays the calculated values. The spreadsheet
shows all attempted iterations and displays failed design constraints results in red.
N
Lesson
optimization
Displaying results
Once an optimized solution for the model has been reached, you can view results from each iteration
in Post-processing or in the Optimization spreadsheet.
yS
Animation results from each iteration of a geometry optimization solve
N
Activity
Geometry Optimization — This activity demonstrates using geometry optimization to minimize the
weight of a part.
yS
See Geometry optimization in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
optimization
Review questions
1. True/False. Geometry optimization can minimize an objective, maximize an objective, or drive
the objective toward a target value.
yS
2. True/False. An upper and lower limit are defined for each design variable.
3. Is it possible to access the results of each geometry optimization iteration?

N
Summary
• Create a geometry optimization setup.
yS
• Solve the geometry optimization setup.
• Review geometry optimization results.

N
N
yS
Lesson 33: Adaptive meshing
yS
Objectives

• Identify when a mesh can be refined with adaptive meshing.
• Refine a mesh using adaptive meshing.

N
Lesson
Lesson 33:33:Adaptive
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Refining a mesh with Adaptive meshing

Adaptive meshing is an iterative solution process that you can use to improve the quality of a mesh
by selectively refining the mesh in areas in which selected error values, such as strain energy, are
highest. Adaptive meshing helps you to produce a mesh that is sufficiently detailed in the appropriate
yS
areas, such as in regions where higher stress concentrations occur, while controlling the overall
cost of the analysis.
In NX, you can use the Adaptivity solution process to do the following:
• Specify accuracy parameters to identify regions within the existing mesh that have high error
values.
• Iteratively refine the mesh in those regions to reduce the error values.
Adaptive meshing considerations and limitations

N
• You can use adaptive meshing only on meshes that are fully associated to the underlying CAD
geometry. If you try to run an Adaptivity solution process on a mesh that contains manual
modifications, such as nodes that you have repositioned with the Move Node command, the
adaptive meshing process does not work correctly.
• You should create only geometry-based boundary conditions on models on which you intend
to use adaptive meshing. During the adaptive iterations, NX deletes any boundary conditions
that are defined directly on nodes or elements.
• Currently, you cannot use adaptive meshing on meshes within an assembly FEM (.afm).

Adaptive meshing
Supported solution types for adaptive meshing

You create an Adaptivity solution process within the context of an existing solution. Only certain
solvers and solution types support adaptive meshing.
Solution type Solvers
yS
Linear statics analysis NX Nastran, MSC Nastran, Abaqus, ANSYS
Thermal analysis (steady-state and NX Thermal
transient)
Coupled thermal and structural (linear NX Multiphysics
and nonlinear) analyses
Mapping solution NX Nastran, NX Multiphysics, MSC Nastran, Abaqus,
ANSYS
Before each iteration, the software solves the model using the current mesh. NX uses these results to
determine the areas of the mesh that need to be refined.
N
Lesson
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Adaptive refinement process

In each iteration during an Adaptivity solution process, NX compares the generated or existing
results to the specified accuracy parameters in the Adaptivity Meta Solution dialog box. If the
calculated error values are higher than the accuracy parameters you specified, NX refines the mesh
yS
based on the criteria you specified in the Mesh Parameters group of options. For example, you can
control the following:
• How many iterations NX performs in the adaptive process.
• The maximum level of element refinement allowed in each iteration.
• Whether NX should use a local or global remeshing approach.
NX continues the process of solving the model and remeshing until it reaches the maximum number
of specified iterations or until the solution converges. NX determines convergence by comparing the
specified accuracy parameters to the calculated error values. If the calculated values are equal to or
less than the specified accuracy parameters, NX considers the solution to be converged.
NX creates a new intermediate mesh during each iteration, but it does not save these intermediate
meshes. NX only saves the final mesh from the last iteration. However, if the analysis does not
converge, this final mesh may not represent the most accurate mesh.
N
Adaptive meshing
Excluding regions of the mesh from adaptive refinement

You can use options in the Adaptivity Exclusion Zone dialog box to define regions of the mesh that
you want to exclude from adaptive refinement. The software treats these zones as converged regions
that require no refinement. Exclusion Zone items are stored in the Simulation Navigator under the
yS
Adaptivity solution process node. For example, you may want to define an Exclusion Zone in a
region to exclude regions of a part that are not critical to your current analysis.
Note
These regions may still remesh due to changes in the meshes on neighboring regions.
However, changes to the mesh in an exclusion zone are not influenced by the error estimates
in that region.
N
Lesson
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Adaptive meshing output

When the software completes the final iteration, it saves several different types of output. This
output includes the following:
• The solution results, including the error listing for the final iteration only.
yS
If the solve fails during an iteration, NX asks whether you want to keep the mesh associated
with the failed solve.
• The final mesh.
• A summary of the adaptive analysis that provides detailed information

N
Adaptive meshing
Adaptive meshing workflow

Step Summary
1. Build the finite element In the Advanced Simulation application, create the mesh, define the
model. appropriate material properties, and define geometry-based boundary
yS
conditions.
2. Create the solution. Define an Adaptive solution process within the context of an existing
solution. Not all solution types currently support adaptive meshing.
3. Solve the model Create an Adaptive solution process either with or without existing
(optional). analysis results.
4. Create the Adaptive With the appropriate solution active in the Simulation Navigator,
solution process. create the Adaptive solution process.
Use the options in the Adaptive Meta Solution dialog box to do the
following:
• Define the accuracy parameters to use to evaluate the mesh
quality.
• Specify options to control the adaptive meshing process, such

as the maximum number of iterations and the permitted scope
of remeshing.
5. Define exclusion zones If there are regions of your model that you want to exclude from mesh
(optional). refinement, create the necessary exclusion zones.
6. Solve the Adaptive The software iteratively solves the solution and remeshes the model
solution process. until the following happens:
• The solution converges.
• NX reaches the maximum number of specified iterations.

7. Examine the After the adaptive meshing process completes, you can review the
adaptivity results in NX results of the adaptive solution in the Post-Processing Navigator.
Post-processing. For example, you can create contour plots of the strain energy error as
well as the stress or temperature errors. You can also create contour
plots of the mesh refinement level results.
N
Lesson
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Pre-processing requirements for adaptive meshing

The following sections summarize the mesh and boundary condition requirements for a model on
which you intend to run an Adaptivity solution process.
yS
Supported element types
You can use adaptive meshing to refine meshes of the following general types of elements:
• Triangular elements
• Quadrilateral elements
• Tetrahedral elements
Note
If you use adaptive meshing on a model comprised of tetrahedral elements, the adaptive
refinement process refines the associated surface mesh. NX then propagates those
changes through the associated tetrahedral mesh.
You can include other types of elements in a model in which you use an Adaptivity solution
process. However, the software ignores those element types during the refinement process. Other
elements must be geometry-based if they are connected directly to adaptive meshes. During the
adaptive remeshing process, NX first updates the 2D or 3D meshes, and then it updates any other
geometry-based elements that are associated with those meshes.
Note
You can also create contact or glue definitions to connect other types of elements to adaptive
meshes.
Meshes must be associated to the CAD geometry
You can use adaptive meshing only on meshes that are fully associated to the underlying CAD
geometry. If you try to run an Adaptivity solution process on a mesh that contains manual
modifications, such as nodes that you have repositioned with the Move Node command, the adaptive
meshing process does not work correctly.
Boundary conditions must be associated to the CAD geometry

N
You should only create geometry-based boundary conditions on the regions within models on which
you intend to use adaptive meshing. NX deletes any boundary conditions that are defined directly on
nodes or elements during the second adaptive iteration.
Note
Regions with meshes that are not defined on geometry, but which are connected to CAD
associated meshes, can have boundary conditions defined directly on the nodes or elements.

Adaptive meshing
Viewing adaptive meshing results

After the Adaptivity iterations are complete, you can review the results of the adaptive solution in the
Post-Processing Navigator. These results always show the current state of your model.
You can use options in the Post Processing Navigator to create contour plots of the mesh error
yS
values, such as stress or temperature, as well as of the mesh refinement level results.
NX envelopes the results to find the highest error values that it finds across all time steps and
subcases to produce the mesh refinement map. Enveloping the results for multiple time steps or
subcases ensures that the mesh that NX produces from the refinement map is suitable throughout
the entire analysis.
Viewing mesh refinement levels
The Mesh Refinement Level results show the following:

• The combined results for all computed error results.
• The level of refinement necessary at each node based on those computed error results.
N
Lesson
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Examples of mesh refinement results

The following graphic shows an example of a model that has not yet converged. Notice how the
contour plot of the mesh refinement levels (3) shows the combined effects of both the strain energy
and stress error result.
yS
(1) Strain energy error norm results (2) Stress error norm results (3) Mesh refinement level
results
When a solution converges, all mesh refinement levels are equal to 1.
N
Adaptive meshing
yS
N
Lesson
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Activity
Refine a mesh with adaptive meshing — In this activity, you will use adaptive meshing to refine a
mesh on a part.
yS
See Adaptive meshing in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Adaptive meshing
Review questions
1. True/False. Adaptive meshing can refine portions of the mesh where error values are the highest.
2. True/False. Adaptive meshing is available in all solution types except Thermal Analysis.
yS
3. True/False. Adaptive meshing saves the mesh at each iteration.
N
Lesson
Adaptive meshing
meshing
Summary
• Identify when adaptive meshing can be used.
yS
• Refine a mesh using adaptive meshing.
N
Lesson 34: Superelements
yS
Objectives

• Generate an NX Nastran external superelement using the SOL 101 Superelement or SOL 103
Superelement solution type.
• Assemble external superelements into a system model.
• Post-process results from a system run solution.

N
Lesson
Lesson 34:34:Superelements
Superelements
What is an external superelement?

A superelement is a reduced representation of a portion of a finite element model.
To improve efficiency, you can create superelements of several portions (sometimes called
substructures) of the same model, and then combine them in a single solution. In NX, you do this by
yS
replacing a component FEM in an assembly FEM with an external superelement.
A superelement is considered external if it is generated during an independent solve and stored in
an external file.
You specify the boundary DOFs for the superelement. The boundary DOFs are not reduced, and are
used to connect and orient the superelements to residual nodes in the model.
DOFs in the substructure which are not on the boundary are considered omitted or interior DOF.
N
Superelements
External superelement solution types

Advanced Simulation supports the following solution types for generating external superelements:
• Use the SOL 101 Superelement solution type to perform a static reduction of your component.
yS
A static reduction reduces the stiffness, mass, and damping of the omitted DOFs to the boundary
DOFs.
• Use the SOL 103 Superelement solution type to perform a dynamic reduction of your component.
A dynamic reduction combines static and dynamic behavior.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Static reduction overview

The SOL 101 – Superelement solution type performs a static condensation of stiffness and a Guyan
reduction of mass and damping.
If only stiffness exists in the model, the reduction is a static condensation. This occurs when no mass
yS
or damping is defined. For example, density is undefined on the material definitions.
Static condensation exactly represents the original stiffness with no loss of accuracy. You can use
static condensation in any subsequent solution which requires only stiffness.
If mass and/or damping also exist, the reduction is considered a Guyan reduction. In a Guyan
reduction, all interior mass is lumped on the boundary DOF.
You can safely and effectively use a statically reduced superelement in a subsequent static solution.
Significant error may result if you use a statically reduced superelement in a dynamic solution where
it is not appropriate. It may be appropriate to use a static condensation in a dynamic solution if:
• The component is very stiff relative to the rest of the structure.
• You want to exclude the dynamics of a region of the model.

N
Superelements
Static reduction — understanding boundary DOFs

If only stiffness is reduced (static condensation), boundary DOF selection is not critical to accuracy.
Select only the boundary DOFs necessary for connection and orientation. Additional boundary DOFs
do not improve accuracy and may degrade performance.
yS
If you include mass or damping in the superelement, preserving the overall mass distribution is an
important consideration when selecting the boundary DOF. This depends on how you plan to use
of the superelement:
• Mass is required for acceleration loading in subsequent static system solutions.
• Mass is typically included for subsequent dynamic system solutions.

N
Lesson
Superelements
Dynamic reduction overview

The SOL 103 Superelement solution type performs a dynamic reduction.
A dynamic reduction combines dynamic and static behavior.
yS
• The dynamic portion of the solution computes normal modes of the structure. These modes are
called component modes, and are assigned to new, modal DOF.
• The static portion of the solution is the same as a static condensation or Guyan reduction.
Stiffness, mass, and damping of the omitted DOF are reduced to the boundary DOF.
The static portion of a dynamic reduction is sometimes referred to as the constraint modes. It is
mathematically equivalent to applying a unit enforced motion constraint to all boundary DOFs,
and treating omitted DOFs as fixed.
Dynamic reduction in NX is also referred to as component mode synthesis (CMS). The CMS method
allows the boundary DOFs to be free or fixed.
N
Superelements
Dynamic reduction — dynamic and static behavior

You can accurately use a dynamically reduced superelement in either a dynamic or static system
run solution.
Using a dynamically reduced superelement in a dynamic solution:
yS
• The component modes account for the dynamic behavior.
• The constraint modes account for any local flexibility at the boundaries which may not be
accounted for in the component modes.
Using a dynamically reduced superelement in a static solution:

• The constraint modes accurately account for the stiffness.
• The component modes are ignored.
• Because the component modes are not used in a static solution, the additional resources required
to compute them may offset any efficiency gains.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Dynamic reduction — understanding boundary DOFs

Boundary DOFs can be free or fixed.
• When the component modes are computed, the fixed boundary DOF are constrained and the
free boundary DOF are free.
yS
• Boundary DOFs which connect to residual nodes in a dynamic system run solution are typically
specified as fixed boundary DOF.
• Boundary DOFs which may be used as the location of a load or to specify superelement
orientation are typically specified as free boundary DOFs.
The free/fixed distinction is not always critical to the accuracy of a subsequent dynamic system run
solution, because the static portion of the dynamic reduction can contribute to the local dynamic
behavior at the boundary DOFs.
N
Superelements
Defining boundary DOFs for a static or dynamic reduction
For a SOL 103 Superelement solution, you can define a Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom
or Free Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraint to specify free or fixed boundary DOFs.
yS
You can apply these constraints to geometry or to selected nodes. Geometry-based boundary
DOFs update automatically when the mesh updates. To define the constraint, you specify the active
DOFs for the corresponding nodes.
For a SOL 101 Superelement solution, you can define a Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom
constraint. NX Nastran ultimately treats these as “boundary DOF” with no fixed or free distinction.
Note
If you plan to use the superelement in an NX system model, a minimum of three non-collinear
boundary DOFs are required to orient the superelement in the assembly FEM. In a dynamic
reduction, if you define a third boundary DOF for orientation purposes, use Free Boundary
Degrees of Freedom for best results.

N
Lesson
Superelements
Defining DOF sets

For most purposes, the Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom and Free Boundary Degrees of
Freedom constraints provide a robust and easy-to-use interface for defining boundary DOFs. You
may choose to define DOF sets explicitly and assign them to the corresponding BSET and CSET
yS
bulk data entries.
• For experienced Nastran users, explicit DOF set definitions may be more familiar and transparent.
• You can reuse named DOF sets in a number of other solutions or solution processes, such as
flexible body analysis, model updating, and correlation.
To create a new DOF set, in the Simulation Navigator, right-click the DOFSets node and choose
New DOF Set.
To assign the DOF set to the appropriate bulk data entry, in the Solution dialog box, on the Bulk Data
tab, choose the existing DOF set from the Fixed Boundary (BSET) or Free Boundary (CSET) list.
N
Superelements
Setting external superelement solution attributes

The following solution options are specific to external superelement solutions:
• Use Superelement Options on the Case Control tab to create a Superelement Options
modeling object. These options control the output and format of the external superelement, and
yS
are written directly to the EXTSEOUT case control command.
• For dynamic reductions, use the Number of Generalized DOF option on the Case Control tab
to specify the number of SPOINTS to store the reduced modes in the QSET.
As a general rule, the number of generalized DOF should be at least as large as the number
of requested modes.
• Use the options in the DOF Sets group on the Bulk Data tab to specify the BSET and CSET
when defining boundary DOFs explicitly.
The Element Iterative Solver option is not available for static condensation solutions.
In addition, when defining your superelement solution, consider the following:
• When defining Output Requests, you must request the result types in the reduction that you plan
to recover in the system model. As a best practice, request only the results you plan to recover.
Requesting additional results increases the size of the external superelement unnecessarily,
which may offset any efficiency gains.
• When defining the number of component modes for the solution, consider that more component
modes increase accuracy, but decrease overall performance. Component modes must not
include rigid body modes. If necessary, specify a small, non-zero value for Frequency Range –
Lower Limit to avoid rigid body modes.
N
Lesson
Superelements
System modeling workflow

The following steps summarize the overall process you follow to build and analyze a system model
using external superelements.
1. Create or obtain external superelements.
yS
2. Create an assembly FEM.
3. Replace component base FEMs with .op2 superelement representations
4. Connect any remaining superelement nodes to nodes in the residual.
5. Create a new Simulation file associated to the assembly FEM containing external superelement
representations.
6. Create the system run solution and define your analysis.
7. Solve the system model.
8. Post-process results.
N
Superelements
Generating external superelements for Advanced Simulation system

models
To generate superelements, you perform a static condensation (SOL 101 Superelement) or
component-mode synthesis (SOL 103 Superelement) reduction.
yS
When you use these superelements in an Advanced Simulation system model, the following
considerations apply.
• Use NX Nastran 8 or above. Superelements generated by MSC Nastran or earlier versions of NX
Nastran are not fully supported for post-processing.
• Specify DMIGOP2 as the output file format.
• Request only those results you intend to request for the system run solution.
• Include at least three non-collinear boundary nodes in order to transform superelement instances
with respect to the underlying assembly configuration.
• Increase the number of boundary nodes and request additional modes to improve accuracy, at
the expense of system resources and file size.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Replacing a component FEM with a superelement

To replace a component FEM with its superelement representation, you edit the FE Model
Occurrence Attributes of the component FEM in the context of the assembly FEM. In the Simulation
Navigator, the component icon is bracketed ([ ]) to indicate that it is represented by a superelement.
yS
A simple system model in the Simulation Navigator. (1) A component represented by the base
FEM. (2) A component represented by a superelement.
In the graphics window, the boundary DOF nodes are displayed as unattached markers. You can also
display the superelement as either a transparent, lightweight, non-selectable approximation of the
base FEM, or a generic superelement symbol.
When you replace the base FEM representation with the superelement representation, the
superelement ID (SEID) is displayed in the FE Model Occurrence Attributes dialog box. You
may want to refer to the listed superelement ID when post-processing superelement results or
troubleshooting the .f06 file.
N
Superelements
Superelement mapping considerations

When you map superelements to your system model, consider the following:
• The assembly FEM may be associative or non-associative.
yS
• All assembly FEM components to be represented by superelements must also have a FEM
representation (nodes and elements).
• The base FEM does not need to be the same FEM as that used to generate the superelement,
but it should share the same orientation, boundary nodes, and design envelope.
• The superelement representation inherits the position and orientation of the base FEM
representation. The superelement representation must include at least three non-collinear
boundary nodes in order to correctly determine the position and orientation.
• The superelement representation consists only of the reduced boundary nodes and contains no
elements.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Connecting superelement boundary nodes to the residual

If there is a one-to-one correspondence between boundary nodes in the superelement and nodes in
the base FEM, the superelement inherits the connection used in the assembly FEM.
As a best practice, you should always use Assembly Label Manager to resolve node, element, and
yS
coordinate system label conflicts whenever you modify an assembly FEM.
Two component FEMs connected using a geometry-based edge-face 1D connection.

N
Superelements
yS
The corresponding superelement boundary nodes inherit the edge-face connection in the
system model.
In some cases, the boundary nodes in the superelement may not correspond to nodes in the base
FEM. You must then manually connect the superelement to the residual using a node-to-node
connection.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Superelement displays
In the context of the system model, the mapped superelement is reduced to only the defined
boundary nodes. These boundary nodes are displayed using the Unattached Marker Type specified
in the Model Display dialog box. To help you visualize all components of the system, you can display
yS
the superelement representation as:
• An approximation of the base FEM mesh topology. This approximation is transparent, lightweight,
and non-selectable.
• A generic superelement symbol.
(1) An FE model representing a satellite payload. (2)The base FEM approximation of the
superelement representation. (3) The same superelement displayed as a symbol. The
boundary nodes are shown in red. (4) The boundary nodes displayed as unattached markers.
N
Superelements
Controlling the display of base FEM approximations

You can control the display of base FEM approximations and superelement symbols. You may find it
useful, for example, to hide the approximation when connecting boundary nodes to the residual. For
very large models, turning off the approximation display can conserve system resources.
yS
• To control the display of selected base FEM approximations, in the Simulation Navigator,
right-click the component node and select Edit Attributes. In the Graphical Representation
group, choose the representation from the Display list.
• To control the display of all FEM representations in the system model, in the Simulation
Navigator, right-click the assembly FEM node and select FEM Representation Display.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Supported system model solutions

The following solution types are supported for assembly FEMs containing external superelements:
• SOL 101 Linear Statics — Global Constraints, SOL 101 Linear Statics — Subcase Constraints
yS
• SOL 103 Real Eigenvalues
• SOL 105 Linear Buckling
• SOL 107 Direct Complex Eigenvalues
• SOL 108 Direct Frequency Response
• SOL 109 Direct Transient Response
• SOL 111 Modal Frequency Response
• SOL 112 Modal Transient Response

N
Superelements
Solving the system model

When you solve a system model, the software recognizes that the model contains external
superelements, and automatically adds the appropriate ASSIGN, SEBULK, SELOC, and SECONCT
statements to your bulk data deck to perform a system run. No manual deck editing is required to
yS
solve a system model created in Advanced Simulation.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Example: Assigning external superelements in the bulk data file

In this example, two instances of the same external superelement are represented in the system
model. The following ASSIGN statements appears in the File Management section of the .dat file.
$* NX Superelement ID: 4
yS
ASSIGN INPUTT2='path\filename_0.op2' UNIT=31
ASSIGN INPUTT2='path\filename_0.op2' UNIT=32
You can click Preview in the Solution dialog box at any time to confirm that all superelements
in the model are correctly assigned.
N
Superelements
Example: Defining superelement connections and orientation

The connections and orientation of your external superelements are defined in the Main Bulk Data
section of your input file. For example, the two instances of the same superelement shown above
are connected to different nodes, and in different orientations. The following SEBULK, SELOC, and
yS
SECONCT statements appear in the .dat file.
$* SUPERELEMENT MODEL
$*
SEBULK 4 EXTOP2 MANUAL 31
SELOC 4 253 417 418 1602 1766 1767
SECONCT 4 0 NO +
+ 253 1602 417 1766 418 1767
SEBULK 7 EXTOP2 MANUAL 32
SELOC 7 253 417 418 2023 2187 2188
SECONCT 7 0 NO +
+ 253 2023 417 2187 418 2188
N
Lesson
Superelements
Post-processing system models

When you load the results of a system run, the Solution node in the Post-Processing Navigator
expands to display:
• The residual results.
yS
• One superelement data block for each superelement.
Superelement data blocks are listed by their Nastran superelement ID (SEID). You can preview the
superelement ID in the FE Model Occurrences Attributes dialog box for selected superelement
components.
The Post-Processing Navigator. (1) The system model. (2) The system run solution. (3) The
residual results subcase. (4) Superelement data blocks.
When you first load the system run results, the superelement data blocks are not loaded. To view
superelement results along with the residual, load the data blocks, and then use Plot and Overlay
Loaded SE to create multiple superelement post views in the same viewport as your residual. When
you use this command, the software:
• Creates a master post view of selected results for the residual.
• Identifies the equivalent result in each loaded superelement data block, and overlays the results
N
in the same viewport.
• Sets all postviews to Absolute deformation with a scale factor of 1.0.
• Scales the color bar using Combined Viewport Displayed, which specifies minimum and
maximum values based on all results displayed in the current viewport.
You can use Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple post views in the Post-Processing Navigator.
You can then use the commands in the Results tab to apply the same settings to all post views
simultaneously. For example, you can quickly apply consistent deformation scaling to all selected
post views.

Superelements
Activities
Superelements activities:
• Reduce a subassembly to a superelement — In this activity, you use component-mode synthesis
to reduce a large subassembly to four boundary nodes stored in a binary .op2 superelement file.
yS
• Model with external superelements — In this activity, you assemble external superelements into a
system model and compare the results of the system run solution to results for the full FE model.
N
Lesson
Superelements
Review questions
1. For dynamic reductions, the distinction between free and fixed boundary DOFs is not always
critical to the accuracy of a subsequent dynamic system run solution. Why?
yS
2. What are some advantages of system modeling using external superelements?
3. True/False: An external superelement used in an Advanced Simulation system model must have
at least three non-collinear boundary nodes.
N
Superelements
Summary
In this lesson, you:
• Learned about static and dynamic superelement reductions.
yS
• Created a dynamic reduction external superelement using NX.
• Assembled external superelements into a system model.
• Solved and post-processed a system run solution.

N
N
yS
Part VII: Optional topics
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 35: Managing CAE analysis data
yS
Objectives

• Interact with Advanced Simulation while running Teamcenter Integration
N
Lesson
Lesson 35:35:Managing
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Introduction to Teamcenter Integration for NX

Teamcenter Integration for NX is a data management tool used in conjunction with NX. When NX
is used in Teamcenter Integration for NX mode, Teamcenter is running at the same time as a
separate process. Because the two programs communicate, you can create, store, and access your
yS
data within a Teamcenter database.
The integration of NX and Teamcenter provides the following capabilities:
• Management of NX parts and related files.
• Improved access control for data over operating system capabilities.
• Ability to easily revise NX parts, and keep all revisions of a part together.
• Convenient organization of data into user-defined folders.
• Manual and automatic check out and check-in.
• Ability to easily locate stored data.
• Tools to facilitate workgroup and enterprise collaboration.

N
Managing CAE analysis data
Starting Teamcenter
Application icons are displayed along the left border of the startup window. This section of the window
is referred to as the Application Manager. The applications that are available depend on installation
and licenses at your site.
yS
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Locating parts in Teamcenter

All the parts you will need for the class are in the database.
There are two ways to locate a part when you need it. You can:
yS
• Use the Teamcenter interface to create a reference to the parts folder in your home folder, and
locate parts alphabetically just as you do in Windows.
• Search the database to locate each part when you need it.
N
Activity: Log on to Teamcenter and find the parts

1. Start Teamcenter.
Note
yS
Your instructor will explain the procedure to start the software in your classroom.
2. Log in.
▸ In the User ID box, type the unique student name that your instructor assigned to you.
▸ In the Password box, type the password that your instructor assigned to you.
▸ Click Login.
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
3. Find the parts folder for your class.

When you first log in, your home folder is shown.
You can search for data and create references to it in your home folder.
Note
yS
The applications listed in the navigation pane depend on which Teamcenter applications
are installed at your site.
▸ In the Getting Started window, in the navigation pane, click My Teamcenter.
▸ In the navigation pane, from the quick search list, ensure that the Advanced option is
selected.
N
▸ In the folders pane, click the Search tab.
▸ From the Search list, select General.
yS
Clear the Owning User and Owning Group boxes.
In the Name box, type nx_*** where *** represents the acronym for the class you are taking
(for example, nx_mec), and press Enter.
4. Copy and paste the reference.

When the query is finished, you see a reference to the folder. You can copy this reference and
paste it in your home folder.
▸ In the Search Results pane, right-click the nx_*** reference folder and choose Copy.
▸ In the navigation pane, in the Quick Links group, click Home.

N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
▸ In the Folders pane, right-click Home and choose Paste.
yS
You are ready to use the parts for this class.
N
Working with the Teamcenter Navigator

Use the Teamcenter Navigator to work with NX data in Teamcenter without switching to the
Teamcenter software. The Teamcenter Navigator is available from the NX Resource bar.
yS
From the Teamcenter Navigator you can:
•
•
Search for objects.
Open files.
1. Main panel – Displays your personal folders
and the results of searches.
2. Search – Performs an item ID based search.
3. Browse Filter – Controls the display of items

in the Object group.
4. Preview – Shows a preview of the selected

object if it was saved with a preview.
• Create new folders.
• Cut, copy, and paste items into folders.

N
• Drag-and-drop Items from one folder to another folder.
You cannot drag data sets or item revisions from one item to another item.

Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Search for items in the Teamcenter Navigator

You can do a simple ID-based search.
1. In the Search panel, in the search box type a string or a partial name.
yS
2. Click Go or press Enter.
The search is performed on the entire Teamcenter database. Search results are displayed in the Last
Search node in the main group. A new search overwrites the previous search.
N
Simulation Process Management

Teamcenter Integration for NX includes support for Simulation Process Management. Simulation
Process Management is a data model and set of tools that enable you to track and manage finite
element analysis data in Teamcenter.
yS
Using this data model, you can:
• Track item revisions for FEM and Simulation files. When you create a new FEM or Simulation,
specify the number and revision.
• Create a FEM and Simulation on a locked master part.
• Perform where-referenced queries on simulation data in Teamcenter. For example, you can find
all Simulations defined for a particular master part.
• Create CAE data item revisions and edit CAE data relationships in the CAE Manager application
in the Teamcenter client.
• Synchronize FEMs and Assembly FEMs with product structures created or edited in the CAE
Manager application.
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Creating and saving CAE data in Teamcenter Integration

When creating and saving CAE data in Teamcenter Integration mode, be aware of the following
differences:
• When you create a new FEM or Simulation, you must specify a number and revision for the
yS
idealized part, FEM, and Simulation files in the New Part File dialog box.
• When you save a solved model, you are prompted to import any solver-generated files, as well
as any reports. These files are stored as named references in the dataset container under the
CAE Analysis item revision.
N
yS
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
yS
N
Simulation Process Management data model

In the Simulation Process Management model, the idealized part file, the FEM file, and the Simulation
file are stored as separate item revisions with a defined relationship to the master part and each other.
each dataset.
Item Revision
Master Part
CAE Geometry
CAE Model
CAE Analysis
yS
The following table shows the dataset for each item revision, and lists the NX files associated with
Dataset
UGMASTER
CAEGeom
CAEMesh
CAESolution
Files
*.prt — the master part file
*_i.prt — the idealized part file
*.fem — the FEM file
*.sim — the Simulation file
solver-related files
results files
.afu files
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Using Simulation File View in Teamcenter Integration

In Teamcenter Integration, the Simulation File View panel in the Simulation Navigator provides
additional features to help you navigate related CAE data:
• The Simulation File View includes additional columns that list the Teamcenter name and
yS
description of open item revisions.
• If a CAEAnalysis revision contains referenced results files, the Status shows as Solved.
Right-click the revision and choose Show Result Files to view a list of all results files referenced
by the CAEAnalysis revision.
• Simulation Search View is an extension of the Simulation File View. Use this view to search
Teamcenter for CAE items related to the item that you select in the Simulation File View.
N
Finding related CAE items

Right-click an item revision in the Simulation File View and choose Find CAE Items:
• Right-click a master part item revision to find all idealized part item revisions and FEM item
revisions related to the master part.
yS
• Right-click an idealized part item revision to find all FEM item revisions related to the idealized
part.
• Right-click a FEM item revision to find all related Simulation item revisions.
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Cloning CAE models in Teamcenter Integration

You can use the Save As command to create a managed copy of all model data in the displayed
Simulation file in a single operation. You specify the number and revision level for each item revision,
creating a duplicate model structure. To clone a Simulation file, display the Simulation file and choose
yS
Save As. Choose Selected Parts as the Save As Scope, and select all of the items in the CAE
model structure.
A cloned simulation. The entire data structure (revision C) is duplicated.

N
Importing and exporting data

• Use the Import Assembly command to add data on your local operating system to the
Teamcenter database.
yS
• Use the Export Assembly command to place an unmanaged copy of Teamcenter data on
your local operating system.
When you import a simulation using the Simulation Process Management data model, the software
relies on target relationships to locate related files. If you import the Simulation file, all associated
data is imported with it. If you import the FEM file, only the FEM file, the idealized part file, and
the master part are imported.
N
Lesson
Managing
CAE CAE analysis
analysis data data
Review questions
1. What is the name of the Teamcenter packaged solution that enables you to track and manage
finite element analysis data?
yS
N 2. What command allows you to create a managed copy of all model data in a single operation?

Summary
• How Teamcenter Integration and Advanced Simulation work together.
yS
N
N
yS
Lesson 36: Response Simulation
yS
Objectives

• Describe the overall process for analyzing the response of a structure to an excitation.
• Set up and run a transmissibility analysis.
• Set up and run a transient analysis.

N
Lesson
Lesson 36:36:Response
Response Simulation
Simulation
Response Simulation overview

NX Response Simulation is a solution process for use with NX Nastran. It allows you to evaluate the
static or dynamic responses of a structural model that you subject to various loading conditions. The
software calculates these responses using modal approaches.
yS
Sample displacement and stress response functions and stress contour results
N
Response Simulation
Workflow
Step Summary
1. Build the finite element Define the geometry, material properties, mesh, and constraints, as
(FE) model. you would for other structural solution types.
yS
Also, specify the locations of your excitations and define any static
and dynamic loads.
2. Create the NX Nastran Create an NX Nastran SOL 103 Response Simulation solution.
solution.
You can also use an SOL 103 Real Eigenvalues solution, but it
generates only the normal modes.
3. Solve the model. NX Nastran generates normal modes, constraint modes, attachment
modes, and other modal information.
4. Create the Response After solving the model, create the Response Simulation solution
Simulation. process.
5. Review the mode shapes. Review the mode shapes in the Post-Processing Navigator or in
the Response Simulation Details View subpanel in the Simulation
Navigator.
6. Define the damping In the Response Simulation Details View subpanel, you can add
values for each mode. viscous and hysteretic damping.
7. Create an event. Define the type of response simulation you will perform, such as
transient or frequency. The event combines the modal model and
your excitation functions.
8. Create excitation Excitations define the loading for the response simulation, such as a
functions. vehicle's tires following a bump's profile.
9. Analyze the model's Depending on the type of response you are evaluating, the software
dynamic responses to the calculates and stores the results in response functions or response
excitations. results sets.
• Response functions each contain one response (for example,
stress at one node) as a function of time or frequency. You can
plot these function records in the NX graphics window.
• Response results sets each contain responses for multiple

nodes or elements in the model for one time step or frequency.
You can view response results sets as contour plots on the
Post-Processing Navigator.
N
Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Special boundary conditions

Type Description
Enforced motion location The location of an enforced motion excitation that
will be applied on the model.
yS
The solver generates constraint modes based
on these locations.
Nodal Force location The location of a nodal force excitation on the
model.
The solver generates attachment modes based
on these locations.
Static offset load For Transient events, a constant load for scaling
the results.
Stress stiffening load A pre-load you can apply for the differential
stiffening of the structure.
Dynamic load A load you can scale after solving the modal
solution. The solver generates a load set and
distributed attachment modes for each dynamic
load.
N
Response Simulation
Solution attributes for Response Simulation

For a Response Simulation, some of the key NX Nastran solution attributes include:
• Output Requests — Specifies the result types to solve for, such as displacement, stress,
acceleration, and so on.
yS
• Real Eigenvalue and Extraction Data — Identifies the type of solve: Lanczos or Householder.
• Lanczos Method or Householder Method — Specifies the real eigenvalue extraction options
for the solution. Eigenvalue extraction options are stored as a solver-specific object.
• Frequency Range — Limits the modes the solver calculates according to the frequency of
each mode.
• Number of Desired Modes — ND field in the EIGRL (or EIGR if using Householder type) bulk
data entry. This is the number of modes you want the solver to return.
N
Also, if you select a Lanczos solve, you can solve for the modes of a free-free body. To avoid
calculating the rigid body modes, set the frequency range above 1 Hz in the Rigid Body Modes
Below option (located in the Edit Solution dialog box).

Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Response Simulation solve

After you have fully defined your FE model, including excitation locations, any loads, constraints,
and other boundary conditions, you can solve the response dynamics solution to generate the modal
model.
yS
Note
Make sure you have defined solution options before solving. If you do not create a Structural
Output Request in the Dynamics subcase, the NX Nastran solve will not generate the modes
necessary for the Response Simulation.
After solving the solution, you can view the generated normal mode shapes in the Post-Processing
Navigator.
Sample normal mode shapes

N
Response Simulation solution process
After solving the solution, you must create a Response Simulation solution process as the container
for your dynamic analysis events, modal and physical response results, and evaluation results.

Response Simulation
Defining damping
You can apply three types of damping in your response simulation.
Note
yS
For a more in-depth discussion of damping, including equations and a list of NX Nastran
physical damping elements and parameters supported by Response Simulation, see the
Advanced Simulation online Help.
NX Nastran physical (nonmodal) damping
For frequency and transient events, you can define explicit viscous and structural damping in your
model, which NX Nastran applies during the normal modes solve.
This damping is useful when specific elements or materials in the model have known damping values.
For example, you can apply physical damping as viscous damping in a bushing element (Viscous
values in the PBUSH physical property table) or as structural damping in a material (Structural
Damping Coefficient (GE) in the material record).
Use the Physical Damping Settings dialog box to enable the physical damping in your response
evaluations.
User-defined modal damping
Often, you may not know how damping is associated with the model's physical properties. You
can assign a viscous or structural (hysteretic) modal damping ratio to individual normal modes or
to all normal modes.
You can adjust the modal damping ratios in the Edit Damping Factor dialog box.
Rayleigh's damping
Rayleigh's damping is a software calculation of the viscous modal damping ratios for all the normal
modes. The calculated damping is proportional to the stiffness and mass of the model. Define
Rayleigh's damping using the Rayleigh’s Damping dialog box.
Damping is additive
When you run the response simulation, the damping matrix is comprised of all of the input damping
sources you define.
N
Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
FRF and Transmissibility

• Frequency response function (FRF) lets you evaluate the frequency response of one or several
selected output nodes or elements to a unit force load at a selected input node.
yS
• Transmissibility lets you evaluate the frequency response of one or several output nodes or
elements to an enforced motion such as displacement, velocity, or acceleration at a selected
input node.
You can evaluate displacement, acceleration, velocity, stress, strain, shell stress resultant, or reaction
force.
Sample displacement transmissibility functions for three output nodes

Results are displayed under the FRF and Transmissibility Results node in the Simulation
Navigator. The response functions are stored as function records in an AFU file with the same name
N
as your Response Simulation solution process. In the AFU file, the node or element ID and input
and response directions are reflected in each function's name. For example, 23_(91X+,1001Y+)_1
means the function “23” is the input at node 91 in the positive X direction and response at node 1001
in the positive Y direction.

Response Simulation
Analysis events
An event combines the FE model, the modal model, and the excitation loads.
The type of event and the information available in the FE model and modal model determine the types
of results you can evaluate.
yS
Event type Response calculated
Transient The dynamic response of a structure to a set of simultaneous
excitations that vary over time.
Frequency The steady-state responses of a structure to a set of simultaneous
oscillatory excitations. Loads are periodic.
Random The power spectral density (PSD), root mean square (RMS), and
level-crossing rate (LCR) results of a structure to one or more
simultaneous random excitations.
Response Spectrum The peak response of a structure to a set of simultaneous base
excitations defined by response spectrum functions. Loads are
(also called shock response transient shock.
spectrum)
DDAM (Dynamic Design Analysis The dynamic response of a ship's components to shocks applied
Method) to the ship's hull, deck, or shell plating mountings.
Quasi-Static The static response of a structure to a set of simultaneous
time-varying static excitations.
Data recovery
The data recovery method is a key attribute of each dynamic event. Depending on the type of
analysis you perform, you can recover the dynamic physical responses of a model from its modal
response using one of these data recovery methods:
• Mode Acceleration — Assumes the displacements are calculated by adding the acceleration
effects (or the static results due to the inertia forces) to the static responses. Generally, you
should use this method when there is a large static component to your input. For example, use it
if you need to obtain stresses and forces in a structure that flies, in which there is a steady
acceleration with a dynamic fluctuation superimposed.
• Mode Displacement — Assumes the physical responses are the linear combination of modal
contributions from normal modes. Use this method for frequency or random events, especially if
you are interested only in displacement, acceleration, or velocity at a high frequency, or if the
forcing function has a mean of zero. For example, use it if you are interested in the response of a
N
structure that is bolted to a table that vibrates about zero. This method may require more normal
modes than mode acceleration to represent the behavior of the structure.

Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Excitation loads
Excitations can be:
• Nodal force defined by a node, a direction, and a force function.
yS
• Nodal enforced motion defined by a node, a direction, and a function of displacement, velocity,
or acceleration.
• Distributed-load excitation defined by scaling a load that you predefined in the solution (Transient,
Frequency, or Random events only).
• Constant velocity impact or drop impact applied to a single node (using an automatically
generated haversine function).
• Rotating force defined as either a general rotating force or an unbalanced rotating mass about a
given axis (Frequency events only).
N
Response Simulation
Function tools for Response Simulation utility

In addition to the NX Functions and Graphing tools, the Function Tools for Response Simulation utility
is also available. This utility provides useful function commands such as:
• Easy creation of excitation functions, such as pulse, random signal, and ramp functions
yS
• Displacement, velocity, and acceleration data conversion
• Time, frequency, SRS, and PSD data conversion
• Interpolation
• Envelope line
• Equation combination
• NX Nastran Punch file conversion for nodal results
The following graphics are examples of functions you can create easily with the Function Tools for
Response Simulation utility.
N
Acceleration shock pulse (half-sine function)

Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
yS Force pulse (square function)

N
Velocity shock, or step velocity change (ramp function)

Response Simulation
Sensors
A sensor is a nodal location you define on the model where you want to see response function results,
to mimic a real-world test. For example, a sensor could represent the location of an accelerometer.
Sensors allow you to evaluate displacement, velocity, acceleration, and reaction force. Each node
yS
you select in your sensor definition generates a response function.
Sensor capturing reaction force at a node

N
Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Strain gages
Use a strain gage to specify a nodal or elemental location on the model at which to evaluate stress or
strain results in a specified direction. Strain gages define:
• Location
yS
• Coordinate system for the stress or strain results
• Components of the stress or strain results
The Evaluate Strain Gages command generates stress or strain results for selected data
components (for example, XX, YY, XY, Von Mises, or the legs of the strain gage).
A strain gage rosette capturing stress in three directions on an element face

N
Response Simulation
Response evaluations
The software calculates responses in two steps.
Step 1. Calculates Performed automatically when you perform a response evaluation (for
the modal example, using the dialog box, if no modal responses already exist).
yS
responses.
• For transient response analysis, calculates modal responses at every
time point, using time integration.
• For frequency and random response analysis, calculates the modal

responses at every frequency.
Step 2. Calculates Calculated for a given set of nodes or elements, at given time or frequency
the physical points.
responses.
• For transient, frequency, and random events, uses either the Mode
Displacement or Mode Acceleration data recovery method.
• For response spectrum events, calculates peak responses using modal

approximation methods.
N
Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Response functions
Response functions are functions of time (time histories) or frequency (results over a range of
frequencies) stored in AFU files.
These functions appear in the XY Function Navigator and in the Events node of the Simulation
yS
Navigator, where you can plot them and analyze the result data. You can evaluate displacement,
velocity, acceleration, and reaction force at a given node. You can evaluate stress, strain, element
force, beam-element force, and shell stress resultant at a given element.
Sample stress function (drop impact)

N
Response Simulation
Contour results
Contour results are generated over the entire model or over the selected events for a specific point in
time or for a specific frequency. You can view contour results from the Event node in the Simulation
Navigator or in the Post-Processing Navigator.
yS Sample stress contour results

N
Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Activities
Response Simulation activities:
• Set up a Response Simulation analysis — In this activity, you define boundary conditions and
solution options, solve for normal modes, and perform a transmissibility analysis.
yS
• Analyze a transient event using Response Simulation — In this activity, you define excitations
and perform a transient analysis.
• Analyze a random event using Response Simulation — In this activity, you define a random
event and review results.
See Response Simulation in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Response Simulation
Review questions
1. Which type of special boundary condition generates constraint modes?
2. Where do you define the results output requests for an SOL 103 Response Simulation solve?
yS
3. What type of response function lets you evaluate the frequency response of a node to a
displacement at another selected node?
N
Lesson
Response Simulation
Simulation
Summary
• Learned the overall process for analyzing the response of a structure to an excitation.
yS
• Set up and ran a transmissibility analysis.
• Set up and ran a transient analysis.

N
Lesson 37: Flexible body analysis
yS
This lesson describes how to define a flexible body solution in Advanced Simulation, solve the finite
element model, and generate the RecurDyn input file. It also describes how to import the flexible
body into Motion Simulation and animate it in the context of the rigid body motion.
Objectives

• Create a SOL 103 Flexible Body solution in Advanced Simulation.
• Connect the flexible body finite element model to the degrees of freedom in the motion
mechanism.
• Solve the finite element model and generate the RecurDyn Rflex input file.
• Define the flexible body in Motion Simulation and solve the motion mechanism.
• Animate the motion mechanism and observe the flexible body deformation in the context of
the rigid body motion.
N
Lesson
Lesson 37:37:Flexible
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Overview
Typical motion simulations represent mechanisms using rigid bodies that move in prescribed degrees
of freedom according to constraints. These rigid-body motion simulations cannot represent certain
dynamic characteristics, especially those resulting from conditions such as sharp impacts, sudden
yS
changes in motion, or when the component is flexible enough to affect the motion of the mechanism.
For these situations, you can use a flexible body analysis to combine both elastic deformation and
rigid body motion.
This type of analysis requires NX Motion Simulation with the RecurDyn solver and NX Advanced
Simulation with the NX Nastran solver.
To set up a flexible body analysis for a component in your mechanism, you create a finite element
model on the component and define stiffness at the points where it is connected to the mechanism
(typically at joint locations). The NX Nastran SOL 103 Flexible Body solution reduces the dynamic
behavior of the flexible body to a set of mode shapes, which are stored in an output file.
After you solve this modal solution, you associate the flexible body output file (.rfi file) with the link on
which the component is defined in the motion simulation. When you solve the motion simulation,
the RecurDyn solver communicates with NX Nastran and recovers the results. When you animate
the mechanism, the contour plot for the flexible component is animated along with the rigid body
animation.
N
Flexible body analysis
Workflow
Advanced Simulation steps
1. Create a finite element model and NX Nastran SOL 103 Flexible Body solution.
yS
2. Create a finite element mesh on the flexible component and assign material properties.
3. Use a 1D Connection or other constraint elements to define the component's connection points
to the mechanism.
4. Add Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraints to define connection degrees of freedom.
5. Add Free Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraints to define load degrees of freedom.
6. Solve the modal solution. A RecurDyn Rflex input (.rfi) file is generated for the flexible link.
7. Repeat steps 1-6 for each additional flexible component in the mechanism.
Motion Simulation steps
1. Create a Flexible Body Dynamics motion simulation.

2. Create flexible links on the flexible components. Associate each .rfi file with each flexible link.
3. Create a Flexible Body solution and add the flexible links to the solution.
4. Solve the mechanism.
5. Run Animation to view the combined rigid body and flexible body motion.
6. Plot the modal degrees of freedom vs. time to determine the contribution of selected modes
to the flexible body results.
You can select one or more modes of the flexible body and then plot the modal displacement,
acceleration, or velocity.
N
Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
About the flexible body modal solution

You will use the Advanced Simulation application to create a finite element model of the flexible body
and perform an NX Nastran SOL 103 Flexible Body modal analysis, which solves for the natural
frequencies and mode shapes of the flexible body.
yS
The SOL 103 Flexible Body modal solution uses the mode shapes to calculate the modal mass and
modal stiffness of the flexible body. Because the solver typically calculates only a subset of all the
modes for the flexible body, the modal mass and stiffness are a reduced representation of the flexible
body. The solver saves these reduced matrices in the RecurDyn Rflex input file (.rfi).
Then, in the Motion Simulation application, you associate the .rfi file with a mechanism link.
Example mode shapes

N
Assigning a material to the mesh

In Motion Simulation, material properties for a component are inherited from the master model
on which you create the simulation.
yS
N
Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Connecting the flexible body FEM to the mechanism

In Advanced Simulation, in the FEM file, you must define the points where the flexible body is
connected to the motion mechanism. These connection points must be defined at the origin point of
every joint, bushing, force, torque, spring, or damper motion object on the flexible body.
yS
Although you can use any element type to define these connection points, typically you will use
a 1D Connection (spider element).
For accuracy in your flexible body solution, a single independent node (such as the core node of the
spider element) in this connection element should be coincident with the motion object's origin point.
You will define stiffness at this connection node using special constraints described in the next section.
Spider elements defined at revolute joint locations

Make sure the connection node is at a location that creates balanced loading. For example, suppose
you are connecting the flexible body to a revolute joint that is defined on a hole. Define the connection
node in the bore center of the hole, rather than at the edge of the hole.
N
Example of pinned connection (Revolute joint defined at bore center of hole)

yS
Connection node improperly defined at edge of hole
Connection node properly defined at bore center of hole

N
Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Defining connection and load degrees of freedom

In Advanced Simulation, in the Simulation file, you must add special constraints to define the
connection and load degrees of freedom for the flexible body.
• At each connection node where the flexible body will be connected to the mechanism through a
yS
joint or bushing in Motion Simulation, create a Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraint
to define the connection degrees of freedom.
• At each connection node where a force, torque, spring, or damper will be applied to the flexible
body in Motion Simulation, create a Free Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraint to define
the load degrees of freedom.
N
Solving the NX Nastran modal solution

In the Solution dialog box for the SOL 103 Flexible Body solution, you must specify the number
of modes for which to solve and the result types to recover. By default, stress and displacement
results are selected.
yS
N
The solve produces several results files that you must not delete, move, or rename:
• .dat — Nastran input file, needed for later results recovery.
• .op2 — Contains the model geometry and component modes resulting from the modal analysis.
• _0.op2 — Needed for later results recovery; contains the component mode definitions, modal
mass, and modal stiffness.
• .rfi — RecurDyn Rflex input file, needed for representing the flexible body in the RecurDyn solve.

Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Remember the location of the .rfi file because you will need to point to it when creating the flexible link
in Motion Simulation.
yS
N
Defining the flexible link in the mechanism
In Motion Simulation, you must create a Flexible Link that is associated with the component or
body that you defined as flexible in Advanced Simulation.
yS
In the Flexible Link dialog box, you associate the link with the RecurDyn input file (.rfi file) generated
by the NX Nastran modal solution. The Flexible Link Preview window helps you determine the
correct method for positioning the flexible body on the link.
In the graphics window, the flexible link is displayed with its finite element mesh.
Meshed flexible link defined in the mechanism (and Preview view)

N
Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Choosing modes to include in the analysis

By default, all modes from the NX Nastran modal solution are included in the motion simulation solve
except the first six modes, which are considered rigid-body modes.
Including all modes ensures a more accurate representation of the structure. However, for better
yS
solve performance, you can reduce the modal model by removing insignificant modes.
To determine which modes to remove, you can view and animate the mode shapes using the Post
Processing Navigator and Post Processing toolbar. Make sure to include all modes that resemble
the behavior you are analyzing.
N
Solving the model and animating the mechanism

In Motion Simulation, you create a Flexible Body type of Kinematics/Dynamics solution.
When you solve the Flexible Body solution, the RecurDyn solver calculates the physical deformations
at each point where the flexible body is connected to the rest of the mechanism, for each configuration
yS
of the motion mechanism. It saves these deformations in a modal deformation file (.mdf).
Using the .mdf file, the motion solution process calls the NX Nastran solver to recover the
deformation, displacement, stress, and other results on the original, unreduced flexible body. These
transient results are then returned to Motion Simulation, where you can view them within the context
of the animated mechanism.
By default, when you animate a flexible body solution, translational deformation results (nodal
displacements) are displayed for the flexible body. You can also display other results, such as
N
Displacement – Nodal, Stress – Element – Nodal and Strain – Element – Nodal, depending on
the results you requested in the output request for the SOL 103 Flexible Body solution in Advanced
Simulation.

Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Activities
Flexible body analysis activities:
• Flexible body analysis – Advanced Simulation tasks — You define a flexible body solution in
Advanced Simulation, solve the finite element model, and generate the RecurDyn input file.
yS
• Flexible body analysis – Motion Simulation tasks — Continuing with the model from the previous
activity, you now import the flexible body into Motion Simulation, animate it in the context of
the rigid body motion, and perform an interference check between the flexible body and a
sheet body in the model.
N
Review questions
1. What RecurDyn file stores the flexible body's dynamic characteristics and is used to import the
flexible body into Motion Simulation?
yS
2. In Advanced Simulation, in the FEM file, what do you typically use to define the points where the
flexible body is connected to the motion mechanism?
N
Lesson
Flexible
bodybody analysis
analysis
Summary
• Learned how to create and solve the flexible body solution in Advanced Simulation.
yS
• Learned how to define the flexible body on a link in Motion Simulation.
• Learned how to animate the flexible body in Motion Simulation.

N
Lesson 38: NX Multiphysics
yS
Objectives

• Understand the analysis types available in NX Multiphysics.
• Set up a coupled thermal-structural analysis.
• Run a coupled thermal-structural analysis.

N
Lesson
Lesson 38:38:NX Multiphysics
NX Multiphysics
NX Multiphysics
The NX Multiphysics environment allows you to perform a one-way or two-way coupled
thermal-structural analysis.
• The structural analysis uses the NX Nastran Multi-Step Nonlinear (SOL 401) structural solution.
yS
For more information about the Multi-Step Nonlinear solution, see the NX Nastran Multi-Step
Nonlinear User’s Guide.
• The thermal analysis uses the NX Thermal solver.
You can build a single finite element model for both structural and thermal analyses. For example,
you can apply all the appropriate structural and thermal loads and constraints to your model at the
same time. You can couple the thermal solution to the structural solution (one-way coupling) and
include the effects of the thermal results in the structural analysis. For example, you can analyze
how the temperature distribution affects the structural deformation.
You can also perform two-way coupling, in which the thermal solution affects the structural solution
and the structural solution affects the thermal solution.
Defining loads
In a structural or coupled analysis in NX Multiphysics, you define mechanical loads as a function of

time. However, because the solution is static, time is used only as the mechanism to increment loads.
N
Glue and contact support
NX Multiphysics structural and coupled solutions support edge-to-edge and surface-to-surface

contact and glue.

NX Multiphysics
Analysis types
You can use the NX Multiphysics environment to perform:
• Structural analysis. Uses an NX Nastran SOL 401 Multi-Step Nonlinear solution, comprised of
nonlinear statics, preload, and normal modes solution steps.
yS
• Thermal analysis. Uses the NX Thermal solver. Can be a transient or static thermal analysis.
• Mapping analysis. Maps the thermal results, such as temperatures, onto a target model,
which is typically an independent structural model of the same geometry that potentially has a
different mesh than the thermal model. For example, you can use a mapping analysis to include
temperatures or forces in a stress and distortion analysis.
• Coupled analysis. Links an NX Nastran SOL 401 Multi-Step Nonlinear solution and an NX
Thermal solution. The results from the thermal solution affect the structural solution and the
results from the structural solution affect the thermal solution. At the beginning of each time step,
the structural model is solved for the displacements using the current temperatures. Then the
thermal model is solved for the temperatures using the current displacements. The same mesh is
used for both the structural and thermal solution.
N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Elements for structural solutions

The NX Multiphysics environment supports the following types of elements for structural solutions:
Element family Element type

Hexahedral (linear and parabolic)
yS
Tetrahedral (linear and parabolic)
3D
Wedge (linear and parabolic)
Pyramid (linear and parabolic)
Plane Strain Triangle (linear and parabolic)
Plane Strain Quadrilateral (linear and parabolic)
Plane Stress Triangle (linear and parabolic)
2D Plane Stress Quadrilateral (linear and parabolic)
Axisymmetric Triangle (linear and parabolic)
Axisymmetric Quadrilateral (linear and parabolic)
Rigid Bar
1D
Rigid Link
0D Concentrated Mass
You can also create 2D seed meshes to control the placement of nodes on subsequent 3D meshes.
In the 2D Mesh or the 2D Mapped Mesh dialog box, you can select either the Linear Quadrilateral
Seed or Linear Triangle Seed options from the Type list to create the seed mesh. These seed
meshes have the following characteristics:
• They can only be used to create solid meshes.
• They do not have any associated physical properties or mesh associated data.
• They are not written out to the solver input file when you export or solve your model.
For thermal, mapping, and coupled solutions, the NX Multiphysics environment supports 0D, 1D,
2D, and 3D elements.
N
NX Multiphysics
Supported material types

Currently, the NX Multiphysics environment supports the following types of materials:
• Isotropic, both with and without temperature dependence.
yS
• Orthotropic, both with and without temperature dependence.
• Anisotropic, both with and without temperature dependence, only for structural solutions.
For structural solutions, NX Multiphysics also supports composite laminates for solid elements.
N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Workflow for one-way coupling of temperature loads

Step
1. Create the thermal simulation file and solution.
2. Solve the thermal model
yS
3. Open or create the structural model.
4. Specify maximum number of iterations and other control parameters.
5. Adjust structural solution parameters.
6. Enable geometric or material nonlinear effects.
7. Specify the stress-free reference temperature for the structural solver.
8. Request the types of results to output.
9. Create structural solution steps.
10. Create additional time steps to match thermal solution.
11. Exclude elements from structural analysis.
12. Create a temperature load in the structural solution.
13. Add constraints, loads, glue, and contact.
14. Add contact and glue conditions.
15. Solve the structural solution.
N
NX Multiphysics
Workflow for two-way coupled thermal-structural solution

Step
1. Create a FEM and mesh the model.
2. Create a simulation
yS
3. Create the solution
4. Specify maximum number of iterations and other control parameters
5. Adjust thermal solution parameters
6. Adjust structural solution parameters
7. Enable geometric or material nonlinear effects
8. Define coupled solution parameters
9. Specify the initial temperature for the thermal solver
10. Specify the stress-free reference temperature for the structural solver
11. Request the types of results to output
12. Define a preload (structural) solution step
13. Define coupled thermal-structural solution steps
14. Define a normal modes (structural) solution step
15. Add constraints, loads, glue, and contact
16. Solve the solution
17. Analyze results
N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Controlling time steps in a coupled solution

In an NX Multiphysics Thermal Nonlinear Statics or Preload solution step, the structural and
thermal solvers perform their respective solves at each time step. The thermal solver is always the
starting solver. You can control the time steps taken by each solver separately.
yS
The time steps for a solution step correspond to the TSTEP1 bulk data entry.
Note
The thermal portion of a Thermal Nonlinear Statics solution step can be a transient or
steady-state solution. If your solution step specifies that the thermal solution type is Steady
State, the thermal solver does not consider time steps. Instead, it performs a steady-state
solve according to the Coupling Time Option, with time evaluated at the coupling time.
The structural portion of a Thermal Nonlinear Statics solution step is a static solution, and
time is used only as the mechanism to increment loads.
You can control the time steps in a solution step by specifying the End Time and Number of
Increments for that step. The End Time applies to both the structural and thermal solver, but you
can define a separate Number of Increments value for each solver.
The time steps for a solution step are determined by:
time steps = (current solution step End Time – the previous solution step End Time) / Number
of Increments
Consider the following examples.
Previous solution step Current solution step
Number of Increments Time steps (sec)
End Time (sec) End Time (sec)
0.0 10.0 1 10.0
0.0 10.0 5 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0
15.0 20.0 2 17.5, 20.0
Note
The solvers may modify the time step increment dynamically, depending on whether
Automatic time stepping is used in the thermal solver, and whether creep is defined in the
structural solver.
N
You specify the Number of Increments in the Solution Step dialog box on the Time Step Definition
page. The time steps for a solution step correspond to the TSTEP1 bulk data entry.
Note
Alternatively, with Thermal Nonlinear Statics steps, you can specify a constant Step Size in
terms of time. By default, the thermal solver uses Automatic adaptive time stepping.

NX Multiphysics
Specifying coupling times

The structural solver and the thermal solver exchange data at coupling times. At each coupling time,
temperatures on nodes and elements (from the thermal solution) are passed to the structural solver.
You can specify that additional types of data are passed at each coupling time using the options in the
yS
Coupled Solution Parameters for the solution.
You can control the time step increment at which NX Multiphysics exchanges data between the
solvers, up to the solution step End Time. The End Time is always a coupling time. By default, the
coupling times are at each of the thermal solver time steps. Coupling times are added automatically
as common integration time points for both solvers.
To change the coupling time basis, you can use the Coupling Time Option in the Coupled Solution
Parameters for the solution.
Thermal Time Step (default)
The coupling times are at each of the thermal solver time steps.
Example
Suppose the end time for the previous solution step is 0.0 and the end time for the current
solution step is 10.0 seconds.
Solution step End Number of

Solver Time steps (sec)
Time (sec) Increments
NX Nastran structural 4 2.5, 5.0, 7.5, 10.0
10.0
NX Thermal 5 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0
The coupling times are at 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, and 10.0 seconds.
Note
There may be many additional coupling times, depending on any automatic time step
adjustments in the solver.
Structural Time Step
The coupling times are at each of the structural solver time steps. Using the previous example, the
coupling times are at 2.5, 5.0, 7.5, 10.0 seconds.
N
Note
adjustments in the solver.
Smaller of Structural and Thermal Time Steps
The coupling times are at the smallest time step increment of the two solvers within the current
solution step.
Using the previous example, the smaller time step is 2.0 seconds; therefore, the coupling times are at
2.0, 2.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.5, 8.0, and 10.0 seconds.

Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Note
adjustments in the solver. If you have creep defined in the structural solution, the structural
solver may create many very small time steps, and using this Coupling Time Option may
adversely affect the solve performance.
yS
Solution step End Time
The coupling time is only at the solution step End Time.
User-specified Time Step
The coupling times are at the time step increment that you enter.
N
NX Multiphysics
Using sequential or iterative coupling

You can specify the method of coupling using the Mode option in the Coupled Solution Parameters
for the solution.
yS
Sequential coupling
The structural solver and the thermal solver pass information to each other once per coupling time
and do not attempt to converge together. NX solves the first solution until convergence is obtained,
and then solves the other solution using the values from the first solution.
Iterative coupling
The structural solver and the thermal solver pass information to each other for several iterations,
until the variables that are being passed converge. This method requires you to specify the Iteration
Limit, Convergence Criterion, Convergence Norm, and Relaxation values. Coupled convergence
occurs when both temperatures and displacements have converged.
N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Specifying the types of data to exchange

At each coupling time, temperatures on nodes and elements (from the thermal solution) are passed to
the structural solver. Using the Additional Parameters group in the Coupled Solution Parameters
for the solution, you can specify that additional types of data are passed at each coupling time.
yS
Pass Thermal Boundary Condition Pressures to Structural Solver
The thermal solver passes pressures from Thermal Stream, Thermal Void, and Thermal
Convecting Zone boundary conditions to the structural solver. NX maps pressures from 1D or 2D
elements in the thermal solver to pressures on faces and edges in the structural solver.
Pass Structural Contact Solution to Thermal Solver
The structural solver passes contact gap distances and contact pressures on nodes to the thermal
solver. The thermal solver computes gap thermal conductances from gap distances and pressure
thermal conductances from contact pressures. The thermal solver uses gap thermal conductances
when there is a gap between solid faces, and it uses the pressure thermal conductances when there
is a contact. During a simulation, if the structural displacements are such that the faces switch
between being separate and being in contact, the thermal solver switches between using the gap
thermal conductances and using the pressure thermal conductances.
Sliding displacements trigger recalculation of the thermal conductances between the faces.
You can use contact pressures and gap distances in expressions.
Pass Structural Displacements to Thermal Solver
The structural solver passes displacement results on nodes to the thermal solver.
N
NX Multiphysics
Mapping results data to another model in NX Multiphysics

Mapping analysis allows mapping of steady state or transient temperatures onto another model
with potentially a different mesh. This allows you to transfer temperatures onto a target model,
typically an independent structural model of the same geometry. For example, you can include these
yS
temperatures in a stress and distortion analysis.
The target FEM must use the same global coordinate system as the source FEM, and both models
should be geometrically congruent. However, they need not have the same mesh.
Source model Target model

FEM FEM
Simulation file Simulation file
Thermal solution with results Mapping solution
Structural, thermal, or coupled thermal-structural
solution
Note
If the source thermal model was created in the NX Multiphysics environment, you must use
the Mapping solution in the NX Multiphysics environment. If the source thermal model was
created in the NX Thermal environment, you must use the Mapping solution in the NX
Thermal environment.
The mapping process associates a specific element in the source model to each target node or
element. This association is based on the closest distance criteria and controlled by the zone
associations. The mapping process maps results from the selected solution in the source model to
the mapping solution in the target model. The results from the mapping solution can then be used by
the target solution as pre-loads or initial conditions.
N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Workflow for mapping temperatures onto a structural model

Step
1. Define your NX Multiphysics thermal model
2. Define source mapping zones in the thermal model
yS
3. Solve the thermal model
4. Open or create the structural model
5. Create the mapping solution
6. Define target mapping zones
7. Solve the mapping solution
8. Create a temperature load in the structural solution
9. Complete the structural solution
N
NX Multiphysics
Controlling plasticity and creep effects

Plasticity or creep effects exist in the solution only when the Material Nonlinearity option is selected
in the Solution dialog box. You can control plasticity and creep effects at both the solution level and
the step level, by using a Nonlinear Control Parameters modeling object. To disable the creep and
yS
plasticity effects for individual elements or for physical property tables, include a Material Override
simulation object in the solution.
Corresponding Nastran syntax
The Material Nonlinearity option for the solution corresponds to the NX Nastran MATNL parameter.
The Nonlinear Control Parameters for creep and plasticity correspond to the NX Nastran CREEP and
PLASTIC parameters on the NLCNTL bulk entry.
The Material Override simulation object corresponds to the NX Nastran MATOVR bulk entry.
N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Analyzing multiphysics results

In NX Multiphysics solutions, the structural and thermal results are listed together under the same
solution in the Post Processing Navigator.
yS
The available results depend on the Structural Output Requests and Thermal Output Requests
that you specified at the solution level or solution step level, and on the Output Control options that
you specified for each solution step.
N
NX Multiphysics
Activity
Multiphysics – In this activity you will create a coupled multiphysics solution to solve for thermal
and structural results.
yS
See NX Multiphysics in the Advanced Simulation online Help.

N
Lesson
NX Multiphysics
Review questions
1. True/False. The structural solver is always the starting solver in a multiphysics analysis.
2. What are the two methods (modes) that you can use for a coupled analysis?
yS
3. True/False. The number of time steps is the same for both the thermal and structural solvers.
N
NX Multiphysics
Summary
• Learned about the analysis types available in NX Multiphysics.
yS
• Set up a coupled thermal-structural analysis.
• Ran a coupled thermal-structural analysis.

N
N
yS
Lesson 39: Acoustic and vibro-acoustic analysis
yS
Objectives

• Describe the overall process for performing an acoustic or coupled vibro-acoustic analysis.
• Set up and run a coupled vibro-acoustic analysis.
• Use a load recipe to map external data to a model.

N
Lesson
Lesson 39:39:Acoustic
Acoustic and vibro-acoustic
and vibro-acoustic analysis
analysis
Acoustic and Vibro-Acoustic analysis

With acoustic and vibro-acoustic solutions, you can perform a purely acoustic or coupled
vibro-acoustic analysis, for applications such as vehicle noise.
You can perform cavity meshing, create load recipes and define coupling between acoustic and
yS
structural elements, and create structural panels and acoustic absorbers. In NX post processing,
you can analyze sound pressure levels and panel contributions.
N
Acoustic and vibro-acoustic analysis
Supported solutions and analysis types

Acoustic and Vibro-Acoustic analysis types
When you create an NX Nastran solution, two analysis types are available:
yS
• Acoustic — Only 3D Acoustic Fluid elements are available in this environment.
• Vibro-Acoustic — Both 3D Acoustic Fluid elements and all structural elements are available
in this environment.
Supported NX Nastran solutions
The following solution types are supported with both acoustic and vibro-acoustic solutions:
• SOL 103 – Real Eigenvalues
• SOL 107 – Direct Complex Eigenvalues
• SOL 108 – Direct Frequency Response
• SOL 110 – Modal Complex Eigenvalues
• SOL 111 – Modal Frequency Response

N
Lesson
analysis
Defining surface impedance or admittance

In an acoustic or vibro-acoustic solution, you can define acoustic surface impedance (or its reciprocal
admittance) by creating an Acoustic Absorber.
You apply an acoustic absorber on the free faces of fluid elements.
yS
The Acoustic Absorber corresponds to the Nastran CAABSF and PAABSF bulk data entries.
N
Defining structural panels

You can create a Panel in vibro-acoustic solutions. A panel contains 2D structural elements. It
corresponds to the PANEL bulk data entry.
You can use a Panel to compute contributions of structural panels to acoustic pressure results.
yS
N
Lesson
analysis
Coupling acoustic and structural elements

For a vibro-acoustic solution, to specify the acoustic and structural elements that need to be coupled,
create a Fluid-Structure Interface Modeling Parameters modeling object, which corresponds to
the ACMODL bulk data entry.
yS
You can define the wetted surface by selecting the acoustic and structural elements to be coupled.
N
Defing fluid-structure interaction

You can create a Fluid-Structure Interaction Control Parameters modeling object, which
corresponds to the FLSTCNT case control command, in both acoustic and vibro-acoustic solutions.
yS
N
Lesson
analysis
Defining modal damping

With the vibro-acoustic SOL 111 solution, you can define modal damping separately for structural and
for acoustic entities. You can define Modal Damping groups on the:
• Case Control tab of the Solution dialog box
yS
• Solution Step dialog box for each subcase
You can define uniform structural damping and uniform fluid damping in the damping parameter
groups on the Parameters tab of the Solution dialog box. These options correspond to the
KDAMP,KDAMPFL and G,GFL parameters.
In vibro-acoustic solutions, you can define damping separately for the structural and fluid entities.
Damping that you define in these three places is additive.
N
Defining modal contributions

You can define the modal contribution parameters in acoustic or vibro-acoustic solutions. You can
request acceleration, velocity, displacement or pressure results along with modal contributions in
the Output Requests for the solution. The Modal Contribution output request corresponds to
yS
the MODCON case control command.
In a vibro-acoustic solution, you can request modal contributions separately for the structural modes
and fluid modes.
You can request SORT1 and SORT2 results. However, only SORT2 results are supported for display
in NX, in the XY Function Navigator.
N
Lesson
analysis
Defining panel contributions

You can define the panel contribution parameters in an acoustic or vibro-acoustic solution. You
can request acceleration, velocity, displacement or pressure results along with panel contributions
in the Output Requests for the solution. The Panel Contribution output request corresponds to
yS
the PANCON case control command.
• In the Number of Structural Panels to List field, you can define the number of most-contributing
panels for which the contributions to the requested responses are computed.
• In the Number of Structural Nodes to List field, you can define the number of most-contributing
nodes for which the contributions to the requested responses are computed.
• In the Panels for Contributions option, you can define for which panels the contributions to
the requested output are computed. There are two options: ALL panels (as defined in the bulk
section) or one panel (to be selected from the list of available panels).
N
Workflow
Step
1. Create a FEM and mesh the model
2. Create a simulation
yS
3. Create the solution
4. Create groups of structural or absorbent panels
5. Request the types of results to output
6. Add constraints and loads
7. Define the acoustic solution parameters
8. Define the vibro-acoustic solution parameters
9. Solve the solution
10. Analyze results
N
Lesson
analysis
Analyzing vibro-acoustic contribution data

After solving the vibro-acoustic model, you can analyze the panel contribution data and modal
contribution data using the XY Function Navigator.
You can plot the result curves for a particular subcase, type, or degree of freedom for all contribution
yS
data.
You can request the following types of contribution results in the Nastran solution.
Panel Contributions
Panel contribution curves express the contribution of a given vibrating structural panel (the sum
of all its nodes) to the pressure response at a given acoustic node. Panels must be part of
the fluid structure interface.
Structural Mode Contributions
Structural mode contributions express the contribution of a given structural mode to the response
at a given node and degree of freedom.
Acoustic Mode Contributions
Acoustic mode contributions express the contribution of a given acoustic mode to the response at
a given node and degree of freedom.
N
Using a load recipe to map external load data to the model

You can use a load recipe to specify load data and how it should be mapped to nodes or free element
faces in the FEM. The typical use of a load recipe is to apply loads from an external file (for example,
measurement data) to a structural or vibro-acoustic simulation model.
yS
The load recipe defines how the boundary conditions and subcases are created with the data from
data sources. You can use the Load Recipe Manager dialog box to create, edit, and maintain
the load recipe.
You can use a single load recipe to define multiple solutions.
Creating solutions from a load recipe
Once you have created a load recipe, use the New Solution from Load Recipe command to create
a solution. This command:
• Creates steps, subcases, as appropriate for the selected solution type.
• Creates a load as per data type, loaded node or degrees of freedom, subcase (Load Condition +
Tracking value), which also includes creation of table fields.
Updating solutions from a load recipe
You can update the solution from an already created or modified load recipe. The Update from Load
Recipe command updates the subcases with related boundary conditions and table fields, depending
on the options that you select in the Solution dialog box. This command:
• Adds new subcases as needed
• Deletes dropped subcases (including manually added boundary conditions)
• Does not modify other subcase-specific settings

N
Lesson
analysis
Activities
Acoustic and vibro-acoustic analysis activities:
• Coupled vibro-acoustic analysis – In this activity, you mesh an interior fluid volume with acoustic
elements, create an acoustic monopole source, specify forcing frequencies, and analyze the
yS
structural displacements and acoustic pressure results.
• Acoustic absorber analysis – In this activity, you define an acoustic absorber on an acoustic
mesh, and observe the damping effect due to the absorber.
• Create a load recipe – In this activity, you create a load recipe and solve a direct frequency
response solution.
See Acoustic and vibro-acoustic analysis in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Review questions
1. Which simulation object is used to define acoustic surface impedance?
2. From which navigator can you analyze panel and modal contribution data?
yS
3. What is the purpose of a load recipe?
N
Lesson
analysis
Summary
• Learned the overall process for performing an acoustic or coupled vibro-acoustic analysis.
yS
• Set up and ran a coupled vibro-acoustic analysis.
• Used a load recipe to map external data to a model.

N
Lesson 40: NX Nastran SOL 200 Design Optimization
yS
Objectives

• Create an NX Nastran 200 Design Optimization solution.
• Solve the NX Nastran 200 Design Optimization solution.
• Review the results.

N
Lesson
Lesson 40:40:NX Nastran
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
200 Design Optimization
Optimization
SOL 200 Design Optimization overview

SOL 200 Design Optimization is the NX Nastran optimization solution type.
This solution type:
yS
• Adjusts your finite element based design variables within the allowable limits you define.
• Searches for optimum conditions as it adjusts the variables.
• Works within the scope of your overall objective and output constraints.
• Iterates until the solution has converged or a maximum number of iterations is reached.
• Records the iteration data in the *.f06 output file.

N
NX Nastran SOL 200 Design Optimization
Solution types
You can include multiple subcases in a single SOL 200 solution. Each subcase can be a different
solution type. You can create the following types of subcases:
Statics Modal Frequency
yS
Normal Modes Modal Transient
Buckling (also requires a Statics subcase) Direct Complex
Direct Frequency Modal Complex
For example, several static subcases and a normal modes subcase could all be included in a single
SOL 200 solution.
N
Lesson
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
Optimization
Optimization design cycle

The NX Nastran optimization solution process:
• Adjusts your design variables while searching for optimum values.
yS
• Periodically requests subcase solutions and a sensitivity analysis using the current values of
the design variables.
• Uses the results from each subcase solution to update the optimization algorithm with current
subcase responses and gradients.
Each loop through a finite element analysis and sensitivity analysis is called a design cycle.
N
Design responses
A design response selects an output such as weight, stress, or displacement.
• A design objective works to minimize or maximize a response.
yS
• A design constraint places bounds on a response.
• The stress, strain, and force responses require an item code that specifies the type of element
output and the component.
For example, a linear stress response at the center of a CQUAD4 (element code “33”), von Mises
component at the Z1 fiber location (bottom side of the element) uses item code 9.
For a list of item codes, see Item Codes in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
N
Lesson
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
Optimization
Design objective
The design objective is the single overall goal of the optimization.
• You define a design response for the design objective.
yS
• You choose to either minimize or maximize the design response.
• You can define the design objective for the entire solution or for a specific subcase.
For example, the objective minimize weight is typically defined at the solution level. However, the
objective minimize x-displacement could be defined for a specific linear statics subcase.
N
Design variables
Design variables define your allowable changes to the finite element model. Upper and lower limits
define the allowable range.
The optimization algorithm adjusts your design variables while searching for optimum values.
yS
Four types of design variables are available in NX:
• Property. Physical property field design variables such as thickness (T) on a PSHELL. Creates
the bulk entries DESVAR and DVPREL1.
• Composite Property. Composite property field design variables such as the ply thickness (Ti).
Creates the bulk entries DESVAR and DVPREL1.
• Material. Material property field design variables such as the Young's Modulus value on a MAT1
material. Creates the bulk entries DESVAR and DVMREL1.
• Connectivity (fields in the element definition). Element definition field design variables such as
the ZOFFS field on a CQUAD4 element. Creates the bulk entries DESVAR and DVCREL1.
N
When defining design variables, the values entered in the Initial Value, Lower Bound, and Upper
Bound fields depend on the Relation Definition selection.
• Assigned at Export – The initial value and lower/upper bounds represent scale factors. For
example, vary the shell thickness by a starting scale factor of 1.0, lower bound of 0.5, and upper
bound of 2.0. If the current value of a shell thickness is 0.2, the actual variable range used
by the solution in this example is 0.1 to 0.4.

Lesson
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
Optimization
• User Defined – The initial value and lower/upper bounds represent the actual variable range.
Using the same values as the example above, to vary the shell thickness using a starting value
of 0.2 mm, lower bound of 0.5 mm, and upper bound of 0.4 mm, you would enter the values
explicitly. The Constant Term (C0) and Coefficient (COEF) fields can optionally be used to
linearly adjust the variable range (DVID) according to the equation Pi = C0 + COEF * DVID.
yS
N
Design constraints
Design constraints define limits on specific solution output.
• The optimization algorithm works within the scope of these limits as it changes design variables
while attempting to meet your overall design objective.
yS
• You create a design response to select an output type and the design constraint selects the
design response. The same design response can be selected in multiple design constraints.
• Design constraints can be defined at the solution level and in any of the subcases. Constraints in
the solution level can use only weight or volume design responses.
• The design constraint creates a DCONSTR bulk data entry in NX Nastran.

N
Lesson
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
Optimization
SOL 200 Parameters – Bulk Data tab

You can use design optimization parameters to control convergence and the frequency or level
of detail in the optimization output.
For example, you can define these parameters on the Bulk Data tab in the solution dialog box. These
yS
are assigned with the DOPTPRM bulk entry.
• DESPCH – The frequency in which the solver writes the design variable and improved design
variable output to the Nastran punch file.
• IPRINT – The level of detail reported in the .f06 file about the design cycles. This parameter
controls the amount of diagnostic output from the optimizer.
• P1 – The frequency in which the solver writes design cycle output to the .f06 file.
• P2 – The level of detail in which the solver writes design cycle output to the .f06 file.
N
SOL 200 Parameters – Parameters tab

You can define these parameters on the Parameters tab in the Solutions dialog box. These are
assigned with the PARAM bulk entry.
• NASPRT – The frequency in which the solution performs data recovery and writes output
yS
to the .op2 file.
You can output the first and last design cycles only, the first and every n-th design cycle, or no
design cycle output.
By default, output is written to the .op2 file for the initial and final design cycles.
• DESPCH1 – The level of detail in which the solver writes design cycle output to the .pch file.
See the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide for details on all SOL 200 parameters.
N
Lesson
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
Optimization
Post processing
The NX Nastran .f06 output file contains the SOL 200 design cycle iteration summary.
• The .f06 file reports the design variables, constraints, responses, and the objective for each
design cycle in which output is requested.
yS
• By default, the initial and final design cycles are reported, but you can request output for all
using the NASPRT parameter.
• After the SOL 200 solve is complete, open the ascii NX Nastran .f06 file with a text editor.
• The level of detail provided depends on the output-controlling parameters you defined.
N
Activity
NX Nastran SOL 200 Design Optimization – This activity demonstrates the NX Nastran optimization
workflow in NX.
yS
See NX Nastran SOL 200 Design Optimization in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Lesson
NX Nastran
SOL SOL 200 Design
Optimization
Review questions
1. True/False. A single SOL 200 solution can include a design constraint that limits stress output
from a linear statics subcase and a design constraint that limits a frequency value from a normal
modes subcase.
yS
2. True/False. A design response that selects a normal modes frequency requires an item code
value.
3. Where do you find the final design variable values after a SOL 200 solution has completed?
N
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Created a SOL 200 solution.
yS
• Solved the SOL 200 solution.
• Reviewed the SOL 200 results.

N
N
yS
Lesson 41: Import and export of model data
yS
Objectives

• Import model data from external software programs into Advanced Simulation.
• Export model data from Advanced Simulation to external software programs.

N
Lesson
Lesson 41:41:Import
Import and export
and export of model
of model data data
Importing model data

Use File→Import→Simulation to import model data created in other simulation software
applications, and to create a FEM file and a Simulation file of a corresponding solution type.
The imported data can include elements, material properties, physical properties, coordinate system
yS
definitions, boundary conditions, contact parameters, and solution attributes.
For details on the data that you can import, see Nastran import and export support in the Advanced
N
Import and export of model data
Exporting model data

Use File→Export→Simulation to export all FE model and solution entities to a file that can be
used by another simulation software application.
For example, you can export data to a bulk data file that can be used as input to NX Nastran.
yS
The exported data can include elements, material properties, physical properties, coordinate system
definitions, boundary conditions, contact parameters, and solution attributes.
Geometry or part data is not exported.
For details on the data that you can export, see Nastran import and export support in the Advanced
N
Lesson
Lesson 41:41:Import
Import and export
and export of model
of model data data
Solver version support

For the NX 10 release, the following table lists the supported solver versions for import and export.
Solver File Type NX 10
Import ASCII (.dat) 10
yS
Import Binary (.op2) 10
NX Nastran
Export ASCII (.dat) 10
Post-processing of Results (.op2, .xdb) 10
Import ASCII (.dat) 2013.1
Import Binary (.op2) 2013.1
MSC Nastran 2013.1
Export ASCII (.dat)
Post-processing of Results (.op2, .xdb) 2013.1
Import ASCII (.inp) 6.13
Import Binary N/A
Abaqus Export ASCII (.inp) 6.13
Post-processing of Results (.fil) 6.14
Post-processing of Results (.odb) 6.13-5
Solver File Type NX 10
Import ASCII (PREP7, CDB) 15.0

Import Binary (.rst, .rth) 15.0
ANSYS 15.0
Export ASCII (.inp)
Post-processing of Results 15.0
Import ASCII 971R6.0
Import Binary N/A
LS-DYNA 971R6.0
Export ASCII (.k)
Post-processing of Results 971R7.1
Permas Post-processing of Results (.res, .post) 13
Import ASCII (.dat) 16.1 (build 16.1-02)
Import Binary (.sdb) 16.1 (build 16.1-02)
SAMCEF
Export ASCII (.dat) 16.1 (build 16.1-02)
Post-processing of Results (.des, .fac) 16.1 (build 16.1-02)
N
I-deas Universal files

The Advanced Simulation software both imports and exports Universal files that conform to the NX
I-deas 5 Universal file specification.
The ability to work with I-deas Universal files within NX is particularly useful if you use custom
yS
applications, such as in-house solvers, which accept Universal files as their input.
N
Lesson
Lesson 41:41:Import
Import and export
and export of model
of model data data
Import and export I-deas Universal files

1. Import datasets from an I-deas Universal (UNV) file. Advanced Simulation uses those datasets
to create a new FEM file.
yS
2. In the FEM file, modify the nodes, elements, physical properties, and materials.
3. When you complete the modifications, export the modified file to a new Universal file.
For a list of the supported datasets, see I-deas Universal files in the Advanced Simulation online Help.
N
Activities
Import and export of model data activities:
• Import an I-deas universal file — In this activity, you import an I-deas universal file.
yS
• Import an NX Nastran bulk data file — In this activity, you import a Nastran input file.
N
Lesson
Lesson 41:41:Import
Import and export
and export of model
of model data data
Review question
1. Give an example of why you might want to import or export model data.
yS
N
Summary
• Import model data from NX Nastran and I-deas.
yS
• Export model data from NX.
N
N
yS
Lesson 42: Templates
yS
Objectives

• Use a template when creating a new FEM file or Simulation file.
• Create a template to store finite element model standards.

N
Lesson
Lesson 42:42:Templates
Templates
New file templates overview

Templates:
• Are available in the File New dialog box.
yS
• Function like seed parts that you can use as a basis for creating/developing/modeling an item.
• Refer to a .prt, .fem, or .sim file.

N
Templates
File New tabs

The tabs on the File, New dialog box organize the templates logically.
Each tab (for example, Simulation) is defined by a .pax file.
yS
A .pax file defines which templates appear on that tab and other details, such as the tab name
and template names that appear in the File New dialog box, the application started by a selected
template, and so on. Templates can go into more than one tab.
The Simulation .pax file is ugs_cae_templates.pax. It is located in the templates directory:
$UGII_BASE_DIR\UGII\templates.
N
Lesson
Templates
Standard templates
Advanced Simulation provides standard Simulation file and FEM file templates for all solver types,
including NX Nastran, NX Thermal/Flow, NX Electronic Systems Cooling, and NX Space Systems
Thermal.
yS
You also get a blank Simulation or FEM file template, which lets you create a file without any preset
parameters.
When you select a template, you can choose to set units to millimeters or inches.
N
Templates
User-defined templates
You can create your own templates based on the requirements at your site. For example, a template
might contain:
• A FEM that uses the same coordinate systems, materials, physical properties, mesh color
yS
schemes, and naming conventions.
• An analysis that is done repeatedly through a design cycle: the same loads and constraints
are applied to each iteration.
N
Lesson
Templates
Create a new file using a template

1. Choose File→New.
2. In the File New dialog box, click the tab for the type of templates you want (for example,
yS
Simulation).
3. Click the template you want in the Templates list box.
4. (Optional) Define a Name for the new file.
5. (Optional) Specify the directory Folder for the new file.

N
Templates
Activity
Create a template file — In this activity, you create a FEM template containing predefined physical
and material properties and mesh collectors.
yS
N
Lesson
Templates
Review questions
1. True/False. Advanced Simulation contains a variety of standard templates for a number of
solver types and unit systems.
yS
2. True/False. Advanced Simulation allows the user to create customized templates.
3. Give examples of how user-defined templates might enhance productivity.

N
Templates
Summary
• Use a template to create a new FEM file or Simulation file.
yS
• Create a template to store finite element model standards.
N
N
yS
Lesson 43: The finite element analysis method
yS
Objective
In this lesson, you will:

• Review the finite element analysis method.
N
Lesson
Lesson 43:43:The finite
The finite element
element analysis
analysis method
method
The finite element method

The finite element method is the numerical procedure used to perform a finite element analysis.
The finite element method can be applied to problems from structures, fluid mechanics, and heat
transfer, among others.
yS
Using the principle of minimum potential energy, the finite element method can be formulated to solve
static structural problems. The basis of this formulation is that:
• A structure is in static equilibrium when the potential energy, Π, of the structure is a minimum.
• The potential energy of a structure is the strain energy of the structure, Λ, minus the work
potential of the external forces, W.
N
The finite element analysis method
Finite element mesh

You create a finite element mesh by dividing the structure into discrete regions called elements. The
points where elements are connected are called nodes.
• Elements are simple geometric shapes like triangles or quadrilaterals for 2D problems and
yS
tetrahedrons and hexahedrons for 3D problems.
• Nodes are the locations where forces and constraints are specified, and reactions and
displacements are computed.
• The strain energy of the structure is the sum of the element strain energies, Λ(e).
• The element strain energy is the inner product of the element stress field, {σ(e)}, and the element
strain field, {ε(e)}, integrated over the element volume, V(e).
• The constitutive matrix, [E(e)], relates stresses and strains.

N
Lesson
The finite element
element analysis
analysis method
method
Assumed displacement field

To evaluate the expression for the element strain energy, a displacement field is assumed for the
element.
• The displacement at any location within the element is interpolated from the nodal displacements.
yS
• The interpolating functions are customarily called shape functions.
• The assumed displacement field, {d(e)}, is the product of the shape function matrix, [N(e)], and the
nodal displacements, {D(e)}.
• The element strain field is found by differentiating the assumed displacement field.
N
Element stiffness
The element stiffness matrix, [k(e)], relates nodal displacements to element strain energy.
• The element stiffness matrix is expressed in terms of derivatives of the shape functions, [B(e)],
and the constitutive matrix.
yS
• Entries in the element stiffness matrix are obtained by integrating over the element volume.
N
Lesson
The finite element
element analysis
analysis method
method
Equilibrium equation
The equilibrium equation is obtained by minimizing the potential energy of the structure.
• A global displacement vector, {D}, containing all the nodal displacements is assembled from
the nodal displacements.
yS
• The strain energy of the structure is expressed in terms of the global displacement vector and a
global stiffness matrix, [K], which is the matrix that represents the stiffness of the entire structure.
• The work potential of the external forces is expressed as the inner product of the global
displacement vector and an external force vector, {F}, that contains the external forces acting at
the nodes.
N
Global stiffness
The global stiffness matrix is assembled from the element stiffness matrices.
• The size of the element stiffness matrices is increased to be conformable with the global
displacement vector.
yS
• The contributions from each element stiffness matrix are summed to produce the global stiffness
matrix.
N
Lesson
The finite element
element analysis
analysis method
method
Solving and results recovery

After the global stiffness matrix is assembled, the equilibrium equation is partitioned to separate the
known nodal displacements, D0, from the unknown nodal displacements, DU. Doing so also partitions
the external force vector, F, into:
yS
• Known applied forces, P, acting where nodal displacements are unknown.
• Unknown reactions, R, acting where nodal displacements are known.
The partitioned equilibrium equation is then solved for the unknown nodal displacements. Using the
nodal displacements, other results like reaction forces, strains, stresses, and so on are calculated.
These final calculations are referred to as results recovery.
N
Index
Numerics/Symbols
yS
1D element sections . . . . . . . .
1D meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Mapped Mesh command . .
2D Mesh command . . . . . . . .
2D meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Swept Mesh command . . . .
3D Tetrahedral Mesh command
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Absolute coordinate system . . . . . . . . . 21-7

Abstraction
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Abstraction tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Acoustic Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-4
Acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-2
supported solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-3
workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-11
Acoustic surface impedance . . . . . . . . 39-4
Adaptive meshing
Boundary condition requirements . . . . 33-8
mesh requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
refinement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-3
15-3
4-11
. 4-5
. 4-5
18-2
. 4-3
Analysis events
Response Simulation . . . . . . . .
Analysis types
NX Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Animation
mode shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Animation command . . . . . . . . . .
Anisotropic material
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
associative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting component FEMs . .
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
non-associative . . . . . . . . . . . .
resolving label conflicts . . . . . .
subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assemby FEMs
workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Nodal Coordinate System
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attributes
solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Coupling command . . .
Automatic face pairs
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axisymmetric model
aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 36-9
. 6-9–6-10
. . . 25-12
. . . . 7-17
. . . . 13-3
30-2–30-3
. . . . 30-6
. . . 30-10
. . . . 30-5
. . . . 30-7
. . . 30-11
. . . . 30-8
. . . . 30-4
. . . 19-10
. . . . . 6-6
29-5–29-6
. . . . 28-3
. . . 29-10
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8 Axisymmetric Structural analysis . . . 6-9–6-10
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9–33-10 Axisymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
uses of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
N
B
Adaptivity exclusion zone . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
Adaptivity solution process . . . . . . . . . 33-3 Basic Curves dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Add Fillets option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 Beam cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Advanced Nonlinear Dynamic analysis displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9–15-10
(explicit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 displaying results on . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Advanced Nonlinear Statics analysis fillets in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
(implicit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 Beam elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Advanced Nonlinear Transient Response Beam meshing
analysis (implicit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 preparing model for . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Advanced Simulation Beam stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12–15-14
compared to Design Simulation . . . . . . 1-2 Boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2–5-3
mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions Index-1

Index
Index
buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7 work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8

modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7 Coupled DOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . 31-10 Coupled elements
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4 vibro-acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 39-6
thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7–26-8 Coupling
yS
with adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8 automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
Buckling analysis Multiphysics . . . . . 38-6–38-7, 38-9, 38-11
analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4 Multiphysics time steps . . . . . . . . . . 38-8
boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7 Create Report command . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2 Creep
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5 Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-15
linear theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3 Cross Section View command . . . . . . 15-15
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6 Cross sections
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9 1D elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8 beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Bulk data displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9–15-10
SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10 displaying results on . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Cross Sections
C fillets in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Curve tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Clone Curves option
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18 Display Section list . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Collapse Edge command . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Cutting planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Combine Triangles command . . . . . . . . 19-8 Cyclic symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
Conflicts
resolving for assemblies . . . . . . . . . 30-11 D
resolving for constraints . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Connections Damping
between component FEMs . . . . . . . 30-10 vibro-acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 39-8
geometry based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5 .dat file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13
Constraint conflicts Data model
resolving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12 Simulation Process Management . . . 35-15
Constraints DDAM event
fixed translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9
Geometry optimization . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6 Deformation
pinned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 post view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Delete Face command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Design constraints
symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 29-4 SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-9
N
Contact Design objective
solution method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6 SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6
Contact Analysis Convergence tab Design responses
on Nastran Solution Monitor . . . . . . . 28-7 SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-5
Contour results Design variables
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 36-17 SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7
Coordinate systems Direct Frequency Response
in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10
local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9 Displacements
nodal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6 nodal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-8
Index-2 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10

Index
Display 2D Element Thickness and stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-5

Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Divide Face command . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 used with adaptive meshing . . . . . . . 33-8
DOF sets Enforced motion location
in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4
yS
Drag and drop Equilibrium equation . . . . . . . . . . 43-6, 43-8
in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Excitation loads
Dynamic Design Analysis Method event Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 36-10
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Excluded option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Dynamic load Exclusion zone
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4 adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
Export
E from Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19
I-deas universal files . . . . . . . . 41-5–41-6
Edges model data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-3
collapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Extract Body command . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 F
stitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Edit .f04 file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13
from Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . 2-8 .f06 file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13
Element Associated Data command . . 13-10 Face pairs
Element Copy and Project command . . . 19-6 contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
Element Copy and Reflect command . . . 19-6 Faces
Element Copy and Translate merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Element Create command . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 FEM file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
Element Delete command . . . . . . . . . . 19-9 Fields
Element Extract command . . . . . . . . . 19-10 in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Element Extrude command . . . . . . . . . 19-7 Files
Element force output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 input to solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Element Modify Label command . . . . . . 19-9 NX Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13
Element Modify Order command . . . . . 19-10 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Element Operations toolbar . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Find CAE Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
Element Revolve command . . . . . . . . . 19-7 Finite element analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Element stiffness matrix . . . . . . . . . . . 43-5 process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Element strain energy . . . . . . . . . 43-4–43-5 Fixed translation constraint . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Element thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 flexible body analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-3
Elements Fluid material
N
buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5 definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 Fluid-structure parameters
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-3 modeling object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-7
displacement field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4 Force command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
for multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4 Free Coincident option . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 Free mesh
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . 31-7 Frequency event
RBE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9
RBE3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 Frequency response function
spider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8

Index
Index
Function Tools for Response for contact solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6

Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-11 Lanczos solve
rigid body modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
G Linear Buckling analysis . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10
Linear static analysis
Geometry
yS
compared to nonlinear static
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-5
Geometry abstraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Linear Static analysis . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Load recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-13
Geometry optimization . . . . . . . 32-2, 32-10 Loads
objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5 force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
solver iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9 incrementing in nonlinear static
variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7 analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-13–31-14
Geometry optimization constraints . . . . 32-6 structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Geometry optimization workflow . . . . . . 32-3 Local coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Geometry-based connections . . . . . . . . 16-5 .log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13
Global stiffness matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-7
Glue Coincident option . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Glue Non-Coincident option . . . . . . . . . 16-3 M
Graph Mapped mesh
saving formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5 Mapping
Groups Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-13
in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Marker On/Off command . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Mass
H modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
Material orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Hyperelastic material
Material plasticity conditions
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
nonlinear analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
Material properties
I thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
I-deas universal files Material types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
import and export . . . . . . . . . . 41-5–41-6 for Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5
Idealized part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15 Material View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Identify command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Materials
Import buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
from Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19 defining orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
I-deas universal files . . . . . . . . 41-5–41-6 modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . 31-8
N
model data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-2
supported applications . . . . . . . . . . . 41-4 thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
Isotropic material Merge Edge command . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Merge Face command . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Item revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17 Mesh
Iterative coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-11 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Iterative solution 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . 31-12 2D mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
2D seed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
3D tetrahedral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
L
creating and updating . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Lagrangian method swept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Index
with adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8 rigid body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10

Mesh Associated Data command . . . . 13-10 Move Component command . . . . . . . 29-10
Mesh Collector command . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Move Face command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Mesh collectors Move Node command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4–12-5 Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
yS
overriding properties of . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3
uses of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-11
Mesh controls coupling times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-9
density types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-15
Mesh Display dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 elements supported in . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
Mesh Mating Condition command . . . . . 16-2 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-13
Mesh mating conditions material types supported by . . . . . . . 38-5
defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 one-way coupling workflow . . . . . . . . 38-6
types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-12
Mesh refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9 plasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-15
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10 results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-16
Mesh View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 time steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8
Meshing Method option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 two-way coupling workflow . . . . . . . . 38-7
Method workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-14
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Multiple solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Modal analysis
animating mode shapes . . . . . . . . . 25-12 N
boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2 Nastran Solution Monitor
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 convergence monitor on . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6 Natural frequencies
prestress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8 modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11 Nodal coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
rigid body modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10 Nodal Coordinate System command . . 19-10
solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 Nodal displacement coordinate
stiffness and mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
supported types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4 Nodal displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-8
Modal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 Nodal Force location
Modal contribution Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4
acoustic or vibro-acoustic analysis . . . 39-9 Node Between Nodes command . . . . . 19-3
Modal damping Node Create command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
vibro-acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 39-8 Node Delete command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Modal Frequency Response Node Element Information command . . . 19-9
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 Node Modify Label command . . . . . . . . 19-9
N
Modal prestress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8 Node on Curve Edge command . . . . . . 19-3
Modal Transient Response Node Operations toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 Node Reflect command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Mode Acceleration Node Rotate command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Node to Node connection command . . . 16-8
Mode Displacement Node Translate command . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Nodes
Mode shapes definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-3
modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11 Nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
Modes analysis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2

Index
Index
boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 31-10 Output requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

compared to linear static analysis . . . 31-5 Overlay
difference between linear and nonlinear post view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-5 Override
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7 physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
yS
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
incrementing loads . . . . . . . 31-13–31-14 P
iterative solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-12
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-8 Panel
plastic strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15 in vibro-acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . 39-5
solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11 Panel contribution
solution types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3 acoustic or vibro-acoustic analysis . . 39-10
stress and strain data . . . . . . . . . . . 31-9 PARAM bulk entry
Nonlinear Static analysis . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11
Nonlinear Transient Response Parameters
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Number on Edge option Patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
mesh control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Path command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
NX Nastran Paver meshing option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
analysis and solution types . . . . . 6-9–6-10 Physical properties
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Physical Properties Table Manager . . . . 13-7
O Physical Properties View . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Physical property tables
Objective definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5 Pinned constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
.op2 file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12–6-13 Plastic strain results
Optimization nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . 31-15
constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6 Plasticity
geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2 Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-15
objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5 Point to Edge connection command . . . 16-9
post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12 Point to Face connection command . . . . 16-9
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10 Point to Point connection command . . . 16-8
SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2–40-3 Post processing
SOL 200 bulk data . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10 SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12
SOL 200 design constraints . . . . . . . 40-9 Post Processing Navigator
SOL 200 design objective . . . . . . . . . 40-6 uses of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
SOL 200 design response . . . . . . . . 40-5 Post view
SOL 200 design variables . . . . . . . . . 40-7 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
N
SOL 200 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11 deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
SOL 200 solution process . . . . . . . . . 40-4 overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
solver iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9 saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7 template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3 Post-Processing Navigator
Optimization Setup dialog box . . . . . . . 32-4 loading results in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Orthotropic material Potential energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-6
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Pre-load
Output using thermal results . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13
for beam modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 Pre-stress
Output files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8

Index
Q geometry optimization . . . . .. . . . . 32-10

loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 7-3
Quasi_Static event modal analysis . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 25-11
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 38-16
node in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . 7-3
yS
R thermal analysis . . . . . . . . .. 26-10–26-11
Revisions
Random event items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Rigid body modes
RBE2 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
RBE3 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Reflective symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3 S
Regions
in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Sections
Remeshing 1D elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4 Seed mesh
Report Export command . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3 definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Reports Selection methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2–3-3
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Sensors
exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 36-13
images in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4 Sequential coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-11
Reset command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Set Result dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Resolved Conflict Group . . . . . . . . . . 21-12 Sew command . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 10-5, 10-10
Response evaluations Sheet Boundaries check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 36-15 Shell element thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Response functions display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 36-16 Shock Response Spectrum
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-2 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9
analysis events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Show Adjacent selection method . . . . . . 3-3
boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4 Show Only selection method . . . . . . . . . 3-3
contour results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-17 Simulation file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
excitation loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-10 Simulation File View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
frequency response function . . . . . . . 36-8 Find CAE Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
function tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-11 Simulation Navigator
response evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . 36-15 containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
response functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-16 drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-13 editing in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-5 Simulation Search View . . . . . . . . . 35-16
solve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-6 standard view of data . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
N
strain gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-14 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-6
transmissibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8 visibility in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-3 Simulation objects
Response Spectrum event definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9 Simulation Process Management . . . . 35-12
Result probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 data model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
applications of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11
Result variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13 Simulation Search View . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
Results Size on Edge option
buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9 mesh control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 Size on Face option

Index
Index
mesh control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-7

Smart Selector Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Stitch Edge command . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
SOL 200 Strain
bulk data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10 thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-12
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2 Strain energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-3
yS
design constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-9 Strain gage
design cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-4 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 36-14
design objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6 Strain results
design responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-5 plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15
design variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7 Stress
PARAM bulk entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-11 thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-12
post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12 Stress analysis
solution types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-3 thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13
Solid display Stress and strain data
beam cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . 31-9
Solid mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Stress stiffening load
Solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4
buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8 Stresses
modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12–15-14
nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . 31-11 Structural Analysis types . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-5 Structural constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9 Structural loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Solution dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Structural Output Request dialog box . . . 6-7
Solution output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Subassembly FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
Solution process Subdivision meshing option . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
adaptive meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4 Surface-to-surface contact
adaptivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3 solution method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6
Solution types Surface-to-Surface Contact
NX Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9–6-10 command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
SOL 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-3 Surface-to-Surface Gluing command . . 30-10
Solutions Surfaces
multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 3D curves in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Solver input file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Solver Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . 6-8 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Solvers Swept mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
support for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Symmetric constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Solving Symmetric constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
process of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Symmetry
Spider elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9 coupled DOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
N
Split Body command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Split Edge command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
Split Face command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Synchronous Modeling commands . . . . . 9-4
Split Shell command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Static offset load T
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-4
Stiffness Teamcenter Integration mode . . . . . . . 35-12
modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3 Teamcenter Navigator
Stiffness matrix options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-10
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-5 Templates

Index
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-6 U
description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-2
on File New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 42-3 Universal files
supported solver types . . . . . . . . . . . 42-4 import and export . . . . . . . . . . 41-5–41-6
user-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-5 Unlock Mesh command . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Unsew command . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5, 10-10
yS
Thermal analysis
boundary conditions . . . . . . . . 26-7–26-8 Update FE Model command . . . . . . . . 21-12
definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2 User Defined Constraint command . . . . . 5-6
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6 V
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10–26-11 Variables
solution attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9 Geometry optimization . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7
stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13 Vibro-acoustic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-2
stresses and strains . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-12 contribution data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-12
supported types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3 supported solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-3
Thickness workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-11
shell element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9–4-10 View
Thickness Information Simulation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Views
Time steps in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Multiphysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8 Visibility
Timestamp Order viewing mode in Simulation Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
in Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Transient event W
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-9
Transition Element Size option . . . . . . . 14-3 Wireframe display
Transmissibility beam cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Response Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8 Work coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
N
N
yS
Reference tear-out pages
These reference tear-out pages are provided for your convenience. The following pages are included:
• An overview of Siemens Learning Advantage
yS
• A Student Profile sheet that your instructor may have you complete at the beginning of the course
• The course agenda
• Evaluation sheets for the course delivery and the course materials. You may also be given
information about filling these out online.
N
yS
This page left blank intentionally.
N
yS
Siemens Learning Advantage
Maximize your PLM investment with e-Learning!
Siemens Learning Advantage is a convenient, easy

to use e-Learning portal that provides cost- and
time-effective methods for users to gain skills and
knowledge of Siemens PLM Software solutions. It
contains an unparalleled library of self-paced courses
and assessments, as well as management tools
for companies to measure learning progress and to
administer learning programs.
Competitive advantage
Siemens Learning Advantage courses present consistent methods and concepts approved by
Siemens. Our course development teams work closely with Product Development to ensure that
prescribed processes reflect the intended product usage and industry best practices. No other
training provider can make this claim! And because our learning products are coordinated with
Siemens product releases, you can be confident that training will be delivered in time for your
upgrade.
Benefits include:
• Simple user interface requiring only a standard internet browser.
• On-demand internet access to self-paced courses and assessments.
• Extensive self-paced library supporting a broad range of Siemens products and versions.
• Online learning management system for tracking and reporting training progress.
• Memberships renew on an annual basis and provide uninterrupted access to courses.
Learn more about Siemens Learning Advantage by visiting our web site or contact your Siemens
PLM Software sales representative for purchase information.
N
yS
N
PLM Software
www.siemens.com/plm
Student Profile
To stay in touch with our customers, we are asking for some background information. We will keep this information confidential and will
yS
not share this with anyone outside Education Services. Please print your information.
Your name ______________________________________________________________________ U.S. citizen? Yes No
Course title: [unresolved entity: courseTitle] Dates: _____________ thru _____________
Hotel/motel while training: ____________________________________________ Planned departure time after class: ___________
Employer _______________________________________________________ Location _________________________________
Supervisor/manager: _________________________________________ Emergency contact phone: _________________
Your job title and responsibilities ___________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
Industry: Automotive Aerospace Consumer products Machining Tooling Medical Other
Types of products/parts/data that you work with: ___________________________________________________________
Platform (operating system): _______________________________________________________
Reason for training: _____________________________________________________________________________________
List any training you have had for Siemens PLM Software products, such as NX, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Manufacturing,
Teamcenter Engineering, Teamcenter Enterprise, Tecnomatix, or Dimensional Management/Visualization.
Instructor-led or
Software Training provided by: When Course name
self-paced?
Other CAD/CAM/CAE/PLM software you have used: ________________________________________________________________
Please indicate your experience with the following:

N
Thank you for your participation. We hope our training meets your expectations.
yS
N
Course agenda
Day 1 Morning
Lesson 1 Introduction to Advanced Simulation
Lesson 2 Working with Advanced Simulation
yS
Lesson 3 Selecting entities
Lesson 4 Basic meshing techniques
Afternoon
Lesson 5 Boundary conditions
Lesson 6 Solving
Lesson 7 Post-processing
Lesson 8 Geometry idealization
Day 2 Morning
Lesson 9 Synchronous modeling
Lesson 10 Geometry repair
Lesson 11 Geometry abstraction
Lesson 12 Mesh collectors
Afternoon
Lesson 13 Material and physical properties
Lesson 14 Element size and mesh density
Lesson 15 Beam modeling
Lesson 16 Connecting meshes
Day 3 Morning
Lesson 17 Bolt modeling and pre-loads
Lesson 18 3D swept meshing
Lesson 19 Manual meshing
Lesson 20 Mesh quality
Afternoon
N
Lesson 21 Boundary condition techniques
Lesson 22 Fields and expressions
Lesson 23 Post processing techniques
Lesson 24 Reports
Day 4 Morning
Lesson 25 Modal analysis
Lesson 26 Thermal analysis
Lesson 27 Buckling analysis
Afternoon
Lesson 28 Contact and gluing
Lesson 29 Symmetry
Lesson 30 Assembly FEM
yS
Day 5 Morning
Lesson 31 Nonlinear static analysis
Lesson 32 Geometry optimization
Afternoon
Lesson 33 Adaptive meshing
Lesson 34 Superelements
N
Siemens PLM Software – Delivery Evaluation
Your name: ____________________________________________________________
Course title: Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions
yS
Course #: MT15032 Dates: _____________________________
Instructor: _____________________________________________________________
N
Siemens PLM Software – Courseware Evaluation
Your name: ____________________________________________________________
Course title: Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions
yS
Course #: MT15032 Dates: _____________________________
N
Name (optional): _____________________________________ Location/room ________________
*** If you would prefer to fill out an evaluation online, please go to the following URL: ***
http://training.industrysoftware.automation.siemens.com/eval/
Session ID: __________________________ (Provided by instructor) Must be completed within 2 weeks.
Thank you for attending.

N
yS
Siemens Industry Software
Headquarters
Europe
Granite Park One
Stephenson House
5800 Granite Parkway
yS
Sir William Siemens Square
Suite 600
Frimley, Camberley
Plano, TX 75024
Surrey, GU16 8QD
USA
+44 (0) 1276 413200
+1 972 987 3000
Asia-Pacific
Americas
Suites 4301-4302, 43/F
Granite Park One
AIA Kowloon Tower, Landmark East
5800 Granite Parkway
100 How Ming Street
Suite 600
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
Plano, TX 75024
Hong Kong
USA
+852 2230 3308
+1 314 264 8499
About Siemens PLM Software
© 2015 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management

Siemens PLM Software, a business unit of the Siemens
Software Inc. Siemens and the Siemens logo are
Industry Automation Division, is a leading global provider
registered trademarks of Siemens AG. D-Cubed,
of product lifecycle management (PLM) software and
Femap, Geolus, GO PLM, I-deas, Insight, JT, NX,
services with 7 million licensed seats and 71,000 customers
Parasolid, Solid Edge, Teamcenter, Tecnomatix and
worldwide. Headquartered in Plano, Texas, Siemens
Velocity Series are trademarks or registered trademarks
PLM Software works collaboratively with companies
of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software
to deliver open solutions that help them turn more
Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in other
ideas into successful products. For more information
countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks
on Siemens PLM Software products and services, visit
or service marks belong to their respective holders.
www.siemens.com/plm.
N

mt15032 S NX PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

mt15032 S NX PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIEMENS

Part I: Analyzing a model

Introduction to Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Working with Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Selecting entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 3

Review questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Basic meshing techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

The solution process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

4 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10

Part II: Preparing the geometry

Geometry idealization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 5

Geometry repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Geometry abstraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Part III: Meshing techniques

Mesh collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Materials and physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

6 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10

Using custom materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Element size and mesh density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Setting element size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Beam modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Preparing geometry for beam modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Connecting meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Mesh mating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 7

Connecting edges and faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

Bolt modeling and pre-loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Modeling bolted connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

3D swept meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Creating a 3D swept mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Manual meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Manual meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

Mesh quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

8 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10

Checking your finite element model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

Part IV: Boundary condition techniques

Boundary condition techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Organizing boundary conditions in folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

Fields and expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Fields in Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

Part V: Post processing techniques

Post processing techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 9

Graphing a single result across nodes or elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

Part VI: Advanced Simulation solutions

Modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Modal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2

Thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2

10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions mt15032-s-nx10

Additional boundary conditions for thermal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8

Buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1

Buckling analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2

Contact and gluing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

Contact and glue conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2

mt15032-s-nx10 Advanced Simulation Processes and Solutions 11

Aligning the axisymmetric model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-10

Assembly FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2

Nonlinear static analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1